Yamaha PSR-I455 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-I455

Categorie: Muziekinstrumenten

Type: de handleiding

Owner’s Manual

DIGITAL KEYBOARD

Setting UpReferenceAppendix Quick Guide

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc.,

may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bot-

tom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space

provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record

of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom_en_01)

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide Reference AppendixSetting Up

Table of Contents

Special Features ..............................................................5

Compatible Format and Functions ...................................8

About the Manuals ...........................................................9

Included Accessories .......................................................9

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals 10

Setting Up 12

Power Requirements......................................................12

Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment

...13

Connecting a Footswitch to the SUSTAIN jack..............13

Basic Operations 14

Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................14

Auto Power Off Function ................................................14

Selecting Operations......................................................14

Display Items 15

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16

Selecting a Main Voice...................................................16

Playing the “Grand Piano”..............................................16

Layering a Dual Voice ....................................................16

Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ....................17

Using the Metronome.....................................................18

Adding Harmony ............................................................19

Creating Arpeggios 20

Triggering the Arpeggio..................................................20

Changing the Arpeggio Type .........................................20

Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs 21

Selecting a Knob Effect Combination.............................21

Applying the Filter to the Main Voice..............................21

Playing Styles 22

Using the Music Database .............................................22

Playing the Tabla/Tanpura! 23

Playing Songs 24

Listening to a Demo Song..............................................24

Selecting and Playing Back a Song ...............................24

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............25

A-B Repeat.....................................................................25

Turning Each Track On/Off ............................................25

Using the Song Lesson Feature 26

Three Types of Song Lesson .........................................26

Practicing with Song Lesson ..........................................26

Making Practice Perfect—Repeat & Learn.....................27

Recording Your Performance 28

Track Structure of a Song ..............................................28

Quick Recording.............................................................28

Recording to a Specified Track ......................................29

Clearing a User Song.....................................................30

Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song................30

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 31

Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory

..31

Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory

..31

Backup Parameters and Initialization 32

Backup Parameters........................................................32

Initialization ....................................................................32

Reference

Handy Performance Features 33

Selecting a Reverb Type................................................33

Selecting a Chorus Type................................................33

Pitch Controls—Transpose ............................................34

Pitch Controls—Tuning ..................................................34

Pitch Controls—the PITCH BEND wheel .......................34

Calling up Optimum Panel Settings ...............................34

Changing the Touch Sensitivity of the Keyboard ...........35

Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ..................35

Voice Settings 36

Selecting a Dual Voice...................................................36

Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................36

Voice Editing ..................................................................36

Parameters Assigned to the Knobs 37

Arpeggio Settings 39

Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Tabla

Playback—Arpeggio Quantize ...................................39

Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch ........39

Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and

Tabla/Tanpura patterns 40

Style Variations—Sections.............................................40

Synchro Stop .................................................................41

Tabla/Tanpura Variations...............................................42

Changing the Tempo .....................................................42

Tap Start ........................................................................42

Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Tabla/Tanpura......42

Setting the Split Point.....................................................43

Playing Chords Without Style Playback .........................43

Chord Types for Style Playback.....................................44

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............45

Song Settings 46

BGM (Background Music) Playback ..............................46

Random Song Playback ................................................46

Tempo Setting of the Song ............................................47

Tap Start ........................................................................47

Song Volume .................................................................47

Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song ......................47

The Functions 48

Basic Procedure in the Function Display .......................48

USB Flash Memory Operations 51

Connecting a USB Flash Memory..................................52

Formatting a USB Flash Memory...................................53

Saving User Data to a USB Flash Memory....................54

Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Memory...55

Loading User Data from a USB Flash Memory..............56

Loading a Style File .......................................................57

Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Memory..............58

Deleting a SMF File in the USB Flash Memory..............58

Exiting from a File Control display..................................59

Appendix

Troubleshooting ............................................................. 60

Voice List ....................................................................... 61

Drum Kit List .................................................................. 67

Style List ........................................................................ 74

Tabla/Tanpura Pattern List ............................................ 75

Song List ........................................................................ 76

Arpeggio List .................................................................. 77

Music Database List....................................................... 78

Effect Type List .............................................................. 80

Specifications................................................................. 81

Index .............................................................................. 82

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Special Features

Creating New Sounds

Page 21

By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion, “sweet-

ness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drastically. Param-

eters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, envelope generator

and more. You can create new sounds in real time!

Arpeggio Function

Page 20

Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function

automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the

appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by

changing your fingering or the arpeggio type.

Play a Variety of Instrument Voices

Page 16

The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to

violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the

mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead.

Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

Play Along with Styles

Page 22

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.

The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cover-

ing a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much

more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with

new styles to expand your musical horizons.

Try playing the Tabla/Tanpura feature!

Page 23

This special feature lets you play Indian phrase patterns via the Tabla and Tan-

pura sounds, as if you were using the Tabla machine and Tanpura machine. Let’s

enjoy the conventional Indian music via the panel buttons and Knobs.

067

EuTrance

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the

following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also,

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on

it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 81) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument

or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses)

containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as

water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall

over and cause a fire.

• Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire,

overheating or battery fluid leakage.

- Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.

- Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

- Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged.

- Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins,

coins, and keys.

- Use the specified battery type (page 12) only.

- Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by

the same manufacturer.

- Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings.

- When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long

time, remove the batteries from the instrument.

- When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the

batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging.

• Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss

of sight or chemical burns.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch

and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries,

remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by

Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

Battery

If you notice any abnormality

DMI-5 1/2

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage

to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is

turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When

you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power

cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal

components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and

gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the

desired listening level.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or

keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the

instrument or other property, or operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.

 Handling and Maintenance

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the

possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

 Saving data

• Some data items (page 32) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect

operation. Save important data to external device such as a USB flash memory (page 51).

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights.

Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of

such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR

USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

 About functions/data bundled with the instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

Connections

Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or

destroyed.

DMI-5 2/2

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Compatible Format and Functions

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible

music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer.

The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation for-

mat. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in

mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of

control parameters and effects.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with

peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the

computer is on).

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to

provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

About the Manuals

This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.

 Included Documents

Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Setting Up Please read this section first.

• Quick Guide This section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while

playing the instrument.

• Reference This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions of

the instrument.

• Appendix This section includes troubleshooting information and specifications.

Data List

Contains various important preset content lists such as those of Voices, Styles, Tabla/Tanpura patterns and

Effects.

 Online Materials (from Yamaha Manual Library)

MIDI Reference

Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.

MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Contains basic explanations about MIDI.

Computer-related Operations

Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transferring song

data.

To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Manual Library, enter “PSR-I455” or “MIDI Basics” to the Model

Name box, then click [SEARCH].

Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

 Online Materials (for Yamaha Online members)

Song Book (only in English)

Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing the

user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge.

Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this

manual in order to fill out the User Registration form.

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• AC Power Adaptor

• Music Rest

• Online Member Product Registration

* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when

you fill out the User Registration form.

Insert the music rest

into the slots as

shown.

Music Rest

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals

Front Panel

q [MASTER VOLUME] control ................Page 14

w PITCH BEND wheel..............................Page 34

e [ ] (Standby/On) switch ....................Page 14

r LIVE CONTROL section

[ASSIGN] button ...............................Page 21

[A] and [B] knobs .............................Page 21

t [DEMO] button......................................Page 24

y [LESSON] button..................................Page 26

u [REC] button.........................................Page 28

i [METRONOME] button.........................Page 18

o TEMPO section

[TAP] button ......................................Page 42

[-] and [+] buttons .............................Page 42

!0 [PORTABLE GRAND] button...............Page 16

!1 VOICE CONTROL section

[SPLIT] button...................................Page 17

[DUAL] button ................................... Page 16

[HARMONY] button ..........................Page 19

[ARPEGGIO] button..........................Page 20

!2 Playback Control buttons

• When the [TABLA/TANPURA] lamp is

turned on:............................Pages 23 and 42

• When the [SONG] lamp is turned on:

..............................................Page 25

• When the [STYLE] lamp is turned on:

.........................Pages 22, 40, and 41

Harmnum1

001

t y u i

o !1

!2 !3

Front Panel

Display (page 15)

Setting Up

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

Setting Up

!3 [TRACK CONTROL] buttons

• When the [TABLA/TANPURA] lamp is

turned on:..........................................Page 23

• When the [SONG] lamp is turned on:

..............................................Page 25

• When the [STYLE] lamp is turned on:

..............................................Page 41

!4 [TABLA/TANPURA] button ..................Page 23

!5 [SONG] button......................................Page 24

!6 [STYLE] button .....................................Page 22

!7 [VOICE] button .....................................Page 16

!8 [MUSIC DATABASE] button.................Page 22

!9 [CATEGORY] buttons...........................Page 14

@0 [REGIST MEMORY] buttons ................Page 31

@1 [FUNCTION] button..............................Page 48

@2 Number buttons [1]–[9], [-/NO],

[0/EXECUTE] and [+/YES] buttons ..... Page 14

@3 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit....Page 16

Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument

assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.”

Rear Panel

@4 USB terminals

USB TO HOST terminal*...................Page 49

USB TO DEVICE terminal ................Page 51

@5 SUSTAIN jack .......................................Page 13

@6 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................Page 13

@7 Power supply jack................................Page 12

* For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computer-

related Operations” (page 9). When connecting, use an AB type

USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be

used.

!5 !6 !7 !9

@6 @7

Rear Panel

Tabla/Tanpura Pattern List

(page 75)

Style List (page 74) Voice List (page 61)Dial (page 14)

Song List (page 76)

“Press & Hold” symbol

By holding down one of the

buttons having this symbol, you

can call up an alternate function,

other than the one called up

when simply pressing.

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Power Requirements

Although the instrument will run either from an

optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recom-

mends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An

AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than bat-

teries and does not deplete resources.

Using an AC Power Adaptor

1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off

(display is blank, except for notation staff).

2 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.

3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

Using Batteries

This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline

(LR6)/Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable

nickel-metal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH

batteries). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-

MH batteries are recommended for this instrument,

since other types may result in poorer battery perfor-

mance.

 Installing the batteries

1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off

(display is blank, except for notation staff).

2 Open the battery compartment cover located on the

instrument’s bottom panel.

3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow

the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-

ment.

4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it

locks firmly in place.

When battery power becomes too low for proper oper-

ation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be

distorted, and other problems may occur. When this

happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new

ones or already-recharged ones.

 Setting the battery type

After installing the new batteries then turning the

power on, make sure to set the Battery Type to

Rechargeable type or not. For details, refer to page 50.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 81) only. Using the

wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument

or overheating.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC

outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trou-

ble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.

Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is

still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When

you are not using the product for a long time, make

sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that

came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger

device when charging.

WARNING

CAUTION

AC outlet

AC power

adaptor

WARNING

• Connecting or disconnecting the power adaptor with bat-

teries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of

data being recorded or transferred at the time.

• This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the

specified charger device when charging.

• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an

AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the

instrument.

• Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of

the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly.

NOTICE

NOTE

NOTICE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

 Checking the power status on the

display

 Power source on the display

You can confirm the power source at the left corner of

the display.

When is shown, the power is supplied from the

AC power adaptor. When is shown, the power is

supplied from the batteries. When the AC power adap-

tor is connected with the batteries installed, the power

is supplied from the AC power adaptor and the

indication is shown.

 Remaining battery power indication

You can confirm the approximate amount of remain-

ing battery power at the top left of the display.

Connecting Headphones or

External Audio Equipment

Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo

phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient

monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off

when a plug is inserted into this jack.

The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an

external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUT-

PUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system,

mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device

to send the instrument’s output signal to that device.

Connecting a Footswitch to the

SUSTAIN jack

You can produce a natural sustain as you play by

pressing an optional footswitch plugged into the

[SUSTAIN] jack. Although the footswitch works as

the Sustain pedal for most Voices, it features other

functions such as Sostenuto and Arpeggio Hold (for

Voices 242–287). One of these functions can be

assigned to the footswitch on the Function display

(page 50).

Indicates that the power will be turned off

immediately. When rechargeable batteries are

used, this icon flashes before the power is

turned off.

Indicates that remaining power is insufficient

for operation. Before the power runs out,

replace all the batteries with new ones, or fully

recharged ones (when using rechargeable

types). Note that the instrument may not work

properly, including unusually soft volume and

poor sound quality when remaining power

becomes low.

Indicates that the remaining power is suffi-

cient.

Only one of these is shown.

Harmnum1

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long

period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level,

since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experi-

ence any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-

sician.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-

ponents, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn

off the power for all components.

• When the instrument’s sound is output to an external

device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to

the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the

power off.

• When Split is on, the sustain function does not affect the cur-

rent Split Voice (page 17) while sostenuto and Arpeggio Hold

(page 39) affect only the current Split Voice.

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to

the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing

this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-

ing in reversed footswitch operation.

CAUTION

NOTICE

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Basic Operations

Turning the Power On/Off

Turn down the MASTER VOLUME control to “MIN”

then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the

power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the MAS-

TER VOLUME control. To turn off the power, press

the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a second.

Auto Power Off Function

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this

instrument features an Auto Power Off function that

automatically turns the power off if the instrument is

not operated for a specified period of time. The amount

of time that will elapse before the power is automati-

cally turned off is set by default to 30 minutes.

 To disable the Auto Power Off function:

Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch to turn on the power while holding down the

lowest key.

 To set the time that elapses before Auto

Power Off is executed:

Press the [FUNCTION] button, press the CATEGORY

[+] or [-] button several times until “Auto Power Off”

appears then select the desired value.

Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120

Default value: 30

Selecting Operations

Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to

familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that

are used to select items and change values.

 Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to

increase the value, or counter-

clockwise to decrease the

value.

 Number buttons

Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or

value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes,

the first zeroes can be omitted.

 [-] and [+] buttons

Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or

press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1.

Press and hold either button to continuously increase or

decrease the value in the corresponding direction.

 CATEGORY buttons

Use these buttons to jump to the

first Voice, Style, or Song in the

next or previous Category, and call

up the next or previous Function

sequentially.

• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a

small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the

instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a

long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from

the wall AC outlet.

• Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the

power is turned off. For details, see page 32.

• Depending on the instrument status, the power may not

turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified

period of time. Always turn off the power manually when

the instrument is not in use.

CAUTION

NOTE

NOTICE

• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period

of time while connected to an external device such as an

amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the

instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to

the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-

tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the

power to turn off automatically when a device is con-

nected, disable Auto Power Off.

IncreaseDecrease

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [3].

Example: Selecting Voice 003,

Harmnum3.

Press briefly to

increase.

Press briefly to

decrease.

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Display Items

The display shows all the current settings of the Song, Style, Tabla/Tanpura, Voice and

other related functions.

Harmnum1

001

This area indicates the on/off status of

each function. Each indication is

shown when the corresponding func-

tion is turned on.

Page 17

Page 16

Page 19

Page 20

Page 35

Page 22

Page 41

On/off status

Normally this indicates the notes you play.

When the Song Lesson function is used, this

indicates the current notes and chord of play-

back. When the Dictionary function is used,

this indicates the notes of the chord you specify.

Notation

• Any notes occurring below or above the staff are

indicated by “8va.”

• For a few specific chords, not all notes may be

shown, due to space limitations in the display.

NOTE

Indicates the source from which this

instrument obtains power, AC power

adaptor or batteries. (Page 13)

Appears when USB flash memory is

connected to this instrument. (Page 51)

Power source status

USB connection status

Indicates the current beat of playback. (Page 24)

Indicates the parameters currently assigned to the

Knobs. (Page 21)

Indicates the Function number, the current Mea-

sure number of a Song/Style, or the current Beat

number of the Tabla/Tanpura pattern.

Indicates the chord which is being played on the key-

board (Page 22) or specified via Song playback.

Indicates the on/off status of the current

Song, Style or Tabla/Tanpura. (Pages

23, 28, 41)

Beat

Knob assignment

FUNCTION and MEASURE

Chord

Track status

001

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instru-

ment has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet,

drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical

sounds.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The Voice number and name will be shown.

Use the dial to select the desired Voice.

Play the keyboard.

Preset Voice Types

When you want to reset various settings to default and

simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE

GRAND] button.

The Voice number is set to 020 Grand Piano and all

the settings such as Dual and Split are turned off auto-

matically, with exception of the Touch Sensitivity

(page 35).

In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a differ-

ent Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.”

Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on.

Press the [DUAL] button again to exit

from Dual.

Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice

suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily

select a different Dual Voice (page 36).

Selecting a Main Voice

001–019

(Indian Voices)

Used for Indian music performance.

020–220 Instrument Voices.

221–241

(Drum Kit)

Various drum and percussion sounds are

assigned to individual keys. Details on assign-

ing instruments to keys are provided in the

Drum Kit List (page 67).

242–287 Used for Arpeggio performance (page 20).

Harmnum1

001

Appears after the [VOICE]

button is pressed.

Voice name

Voice number

Shehnai

004

Select 004 Shehnai

Playing the “Grand Piano”

Layering a Dual Voice

Shehnai

004

Two voices will

sound at the

same time.

Appears when

dual voice is on

Quick Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas,

you can play a different Voice between the Left hand

and Right hand areas.

Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split.

The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and

Right hand areas.

You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area

of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and

Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the key-

board.

The highest key for the Left hand area is referred

to as the “Split Point” which can be changed from

the default F#2 key. For details, refer to page 36.

Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit

from Split.

You can easily select a different Split Voice (page 36).

However, you need not select a Split Voice for one of

the Main Voices 272–281. This is because these

Voices already are set up to enable Split automatically

and call up an appropriate Split Voice.

Playing a Split Voice in the Left

Hand area

Shehnai

004

Appears when split

voice is on

Split voice Main voice and

dual voice

Split Point

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

The instrument features a built-in metronome (a

device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for

practicing.

Press the [METRONOME] button to start

the metronome.

Press the [METRONOME] button again

to stop the metronome.

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

Press the TEMPO [TAP] button to call up the Tempo

value, then use the TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons to

adjust the Tempo value.

The dial and the Number buttons can also be used to

set the Tempo.

Setting the Time Signature

Here, we’ll set a time signature of 5/8 as an example.

Hold down the [METRONOME] button

for longer than a second to call up

“TimeSigN” (Time Signature Numera-

tor).

The number of beats per measure is shown on the

display.

Rotate the dial to select the number of

beats per measure.

A chime will sound on the first beat of each mea-

sure while the other beats will click. If “0” is

selected, all beats will simply click with no chime.

Select 5 for this example.

Press the CATEGORY [+] button to call

up “TimeSigD” (Time Signature Denomi-

nator).

The length of one beat is shown on the display.

Rotate the dial to select the length of

one beat, from 2

, 4

, 8

and 16

note.

Select “08” (8

note) for this example.

Confirm the setting by playing the Met-

ronome.

Setting the Metronome Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] buttons

repeatedly until “MtrVol” appears.

Rotate the dial to set the Metronome Vol-

ume.

Using the Metronome

Tempo

090

Current Tempo value

TimeSigN

Number of beats

per measure.

Hold for longer

than a second.

• This parameter cannot be set during playback of a Style,

Song or Tabla/Tanpura.

NOTE

TimeSigD

The length

of one beat.

MtrVol

100

052

Metronome volume

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

You can add harmony notes to the Main Voice.

Press the [HARMONY] button to turn

Harmony on.

Although turning on the Harmony will select a

Harmony Type suitable for the current Main

Voice, you can select a different Harmony Type.

Hold down the [HARMONY] button for

longer than a second until “HarmType”

appears on the display.

After “HarmType” is shown for a few seconds, the

current Harmony Type appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Har-

mony Type.

For details, refer to the Effect Type List (page 80).

The effect and operation differs depending on the

Harmony Type. Refer to the section below.

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function

Settings (page 49).

Adding Harmony

Appears when the Harmony

is turned on.

HarmType

038

Hold for longer

than a second.

Trio

038

Current Harmony Type

• The Harmony function cannot be used in the Tabla/Tanpura

mode. Even if Harmony is turned on, pressing the [TABLA/

TANPURA] button will turn off the Harmony effect.

How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 05

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in

the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard

when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 22).

• Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)

Hold down two keys.

• Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)

Keep holding

down the keys.

• Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Creating Arpeggios

The Arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing

the notes of the chord. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third,

and fifth—to trigger interesting phrases. This feature can be used for music production

as well as performance.

Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn on

the Arpeggio function.

Press a note or notes to trigger Arpeg-

gio.

The Arpeggio phrase differs depending on the

number of pressed notes and the area of the key-

board.

When Split is on, Arpeggio is applied only to the

Split Voice. When Split is off, Arpeggio is applied

to the Main and Dual Voices. Arpeggio cannot be

applied to the Split and Main/Dual Voices simulta-

neously.

To turn off the Arpeggio, press the

[ARPEGGIO] button again.

The most suitable Arpeggio Type is automatically

selected when you select a Main Voice, but you can

easily select any other Arpeggio Type.

Hold down the ARPEGGIO [TYPE] but-

ton for longer than a second.

In the display, “ARP Type” appears for a few sec-

onds, followed by the current Arpeggio Type

appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired

Arpeggio type

For a list of the Arpeggio List, see page 77.

Triggering the Arpeggio

• Selecting a Voice number between 242 and 287 will turn

on Arpeggio automatically.

• When you select one of the Main Voices 272–281, Split

as well as Arpeggio is automatically turned on. This

allows you to immediately trigger an Arpeggio by press-

ing a key to the left of the Split Point after selecting one

of these Voices.

• When the Pedal Function is set to “Arp Hold” or

“Hold+Sus” (page 50), pressing the footswitch con-

nected to the SUSTAIN jack will cause Arpeggio play-

back continue even after the note is released.

Shehnai

004

NOTE

Changing the Arpeggio Type

• When any of Voices 242–287 are selected, it is a good

idea to set the Pedal Function to “Arp Hold” or

“Hold+Sus” (page 50). This setting allows you to use a

footswitch (press and hold) to have Arpeggio playback

continue even after the note is released.

Hold for longer

than a second.

DownOct

002

The currently selected arpeggio

type

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs

The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to add variations

to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Select

the desired pre-programmed effect combination printed above the Knobs, then rotate

the Knobs to enjoy the sound.

Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially

select the six effect combinations provided: (1)

 (2)

 (3)  (4)  (5)  (6)  (1) … etc. The current

combination is shown in the display.

(1)–(2) affect the entire the Tabla/Tanpura sound, (3)–

(5) affect the Main and Dual Voices only, and (6)

affects only playback of the Style and Tabla/Tanpura.

For details about each Knob effect, refer to page 37.

Select the desired Main Voice.

Here, select “178 SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead)

as a synth-lead type Voice.

Press the [ASSIGN] button several times

until (3) (Filter) appears in the display).

Rotate Knob B all the way to the right

(maximum), then play the keyboard with

your right hand while operating Knob A

with your left.

Selecting a Knob Effect Combi-

nation

Only selecting a Knob effect combination will not

affect the sound even if the Knob arrow is not at

the initial position. After operating the Knob, the

selected effect is applied to the sound.

Harmnum1

001

Current value

Applying the Filter to the Main

Voice

• Selecting a different Voice will replace the settings

created via the Knobs with the default settings of the

new Voice. If you create a sound with the Knobs that

you wish to keep, make sure to memorize the settings

to Registration Memory (page 31) before selecting a

different Voice.

• Rotating a Knob to the right while the volume is set to a

high level may result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce

the volume level.

Filter

Cutoff

Filter

Resonance

NOTICE

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate

“Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety

of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres.

Press the [STYLE] button, then use the

dial to select the desired Style.

The Style List is shown on the front panel; also

see page 74.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

on the Auto Accompaniment.

With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the

left of the Split Point (54: F#2) becomes the “Auto

Accompaniment range” and is used only for spec-

ifying the chords.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

Play a chord in the Auto Accompani-

ment range to start playback.

Play a melody with the right hand and chords with

the left hand.

For information about chords, refer to “Chord

List” (page 44) or use the Chord Dictionary func-

tion (page 45).

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

playback.

You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to

Style playback by using “Sections.” For details,

refer to page 40.

If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired

Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music

Database, just selecting the favorite music genre calls

up the ideal settings.

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start

are automatically turned on.

Use the dial to select the desired Music

Database.

This operation calls up the panel settings such as

Voice and Style that are registered to the selected

Music Database. For a list of the Music Database

List, see page 78.

Play the keyboard as described in Steps

4–5 above.

Bhajan

001

This icon appears when a style

number and name is displayed.

Style Name

Style Number

EuTrance

067

This icon appears when automatic

accompaniment is on.

Auto Accompa-

niment range

Split Point (F#2)

EuTrance

067

Flashes when sync start is on.

Using the Music Database

Split Point

Jude Hey

001

Music Database name

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing the Tabla/Tanpura!

This instrument provides 16 phrase patterns (consisting of several measures) using

the authentic Tabla and Tanpura sounds with looped playback. By using the Tabla/Tan-

pura function, try out the conventional Indian music—changing keys and creating

dynamic sound variations by rotating the Knobs.

Press the [TABLA/TANPURA] button,

then use the dial to select the desired

Tabla/Tanpura pattern.

Refer to the Tabla/Tanpura list on the panel of this

instrument.

Press the [START/STOP] button to start

looped playback.

At first, only the Tabla sound will play back. Dur-

ing playback, enjoy creating sound variations via

the following operations.

 Turning on/off Tabla tracks 1 and 2 indi-

vidually

Tabla 1 features the lower pitched part while

Tabla 2 features the higher pitched part.

 Adding the Tanpura phrase and chang-

ing it from 1–4

At first, press any of the [TANPURA 1]–[TAN-

PURA 4] buttons to add the Tanpura phrase.

Next, press another Tanpura button to change

the phrase. You can enjoy four phrase varia-

tions, which are shared among all Tabla/Tan-

pura patterns. To turn off the Tanpura sound,

press the Tanpura button of the current number.

 Changing the Variation via the [A]–[E]

buttons

 Using the Knobs

Adjusting the Volume Balance

Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to

select “1 TABLA/TANPURA,” then rotate Knob

A to adjust the volume balance between the

sounds of Tabla 1 (low-pitched part) and Tabla 2

(high-pitched part), or rotate Knob B to adjust

the volume balance between the sounds of the

Tabla and Tanpura.

Adjusting the Tempo / Transposing playback

Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to

select “2 TABLA/TANPURA,” then rotate Knob

A to adjust the playback tempo, or rotate Knob

B to transpose the playback key in semitones.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

playback.

TeenTaal

001

Indicates the on/off status of the Tabla tracks.

Indicates the current Tanpura number.

• You can confirm the current key and tempo value on

the display. To call up the current tempo value, press

the TEMPO [-] or [+] button.

• The Tabla/Tanpura performance cannot be recorded.

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing Songs

You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of

the functions, such as Lesson.

 Song Category

The Songs are organized by category as listed below.

Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs in sequence.

Playback will repeat continuously, starting again from

the first Song (001).

To stop playback, press the [DEMO/BGM] button.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the

dial to select the desired Song.

Refer to the Song List (page 76).

Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button to

start playback.

To stop playback, press the [ ] (Start/Stop)

button again.

• Gives you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument.

• Demonstrates many useful Voices of this instrument.

• These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for the Song Lesson.

• These piano ensemble pieces are also well suited for the Song Lesson.

• When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these songs are ideal for that purpose.

• Includes famous classical music pieces.

• Includes traditional Songs from around the world.

• Practice Songs for studying the traditional scale of India.

• Songs you record yourself.

• Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related operations”—page 9) and

Songs in the USB flash memory (page 53).

Listening to a Demo Song Selecting and Playing Back a

Song

ForElise

015

Current Song

Each arrow mark flashes in time

with the beat.

ForElise

015

Playing Songs

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Like the transport controls on an audio player, this

instrument lets you fast forward [ ] (Fast Forward),

rewind [ ] (Fast Reverse) and pause [ ] (PAUSE)

playback of the Song.

You can play back only a specific section of a Song

repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B

point (end point) in one-measure increments.

Start playback of the Song (page 24).

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the start point, press

the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button to set

the A point.

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the end point, press

the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again to

set the B point.

The specified A-B section of the song will now

play repeatedly.

To cancel repeat playback, press the

[ ] (A-B REPEAT) button.

To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

Each “track” of a Song plays a different part—mel-

ody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. Each of the

tracks can be muted so that you can play the muted

part yourself.

Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly will tog-

gle the on/off status.

Song Fast Forward, Fast

Reverse, and Pause

• When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast

Forward will only work within the range between A and B.

A-B Repeat

Fast Reverse

During playback, press

this button to rapidly

return to an earlier point

in the Song.

Fast Forward

During playback, press this

button to rapidly skip ahead to

a later point in the Song.

Pause

During playback, press

this button to pause play-

back, and press again to

start from that point.

NOTE

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the

Song, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before

starting playback.

Turning Each Track On/Off

• Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for

turning on or off.

NOTE

Track number off—Track is

muted or contains no data

Track number on—Track will playback

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Using the Song Lesson Feature

You can use the selected Song for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Try

practicing with these three Song Lesson types while referring to the music scores in

the Song Book (page 9).

Lesson 1—Listen

In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The

model melody/chords of the part you selected will

sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well.

Lesson 2—Timing

In this mode, simply concentrate on playing the notes

with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes,

the correct notes shown in the display will sound

Lesson 3—Waiting

In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on

the display. The Song pauses until you play the right

note, and playback tempo will change to match the

speed at which you are playing at.

Select the desired Song for your lesson

(page 24).

Turn off the part you want to practice.

For the right-hand lesson, press the [1/RIGHT]

button to turn off the right-hand part. For the left-

hand lesson, press the [2/LEFT] button to turn off

the left-hand part. For the lesson using both hands,

turn off both the parts.

Pressing the [1/RIGHT] and [2/LEFT] buttons

repeatedly will toggle the on/off status of each

part, which can be shown on the display.

Press the [LESSON] button to start play-

back of the Song Lesson.

After starting playback, pressing the [LESSON]

button repeatedly will change the Lesson number

from 1: LISTEN  2: TIMING  3: WAITING

 off  1…. Press this button until the desired

number is shown on the display.

Three Types of Song Lesson

• If you want to keep a steady playback tempo is maintained

during Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter (page

50) to OFF.

LISTEN

TIMING

WAITING

NOTE

Practicing with Song Lesson

• The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs

(SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page

24), but cannot be applied to the User Songs.

• Song numbers 075–100 only support the right-hand lesson.

NOTE

ForElise

015

Track 1 is unlit

Track 2 is unlit

Track 1 and 2 are

unlit

Right-hand

lesson

Left-hand

lesson

Both-hands

lesson

NOTE

TIMING

Lp2

007

The notation and key positions

you should play are shown.

Using the Song Lesson Feature

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

To stop Lesson playback, press the [START/

STOP] button.

Even during playback, you can change the Lesson

number by pressing the [LESSON] button.

When Lesson playback reaches to the

end, check your evaluation Grade on the

display.

“2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your

performance in four levels: OK, Good, Very

Good, or Excellent.

If you want to practice a specific section in which you

made a mistake or you have difficulty with use the

Repeat & Learn function.

Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button

during a Lesson playback.

The Song location will move back four measures, a

one-measure count will play, then Song playback will

start again. Playback of the four measures will repeat

with a one-measure count-in.

To exit from this status, press this button again.

See How You’ve Done

After the evaluation display has appeared, the les-

son will start again from the beginning.

~~~~~~~

~~~~~~

~~~~

Excellent

Very Good

Good

When the lesson song has played all the way through

your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK,

Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the

highest evaluation.

Making Practice Perfect—

Repeat & Learn

• You can change the amount of measures the Repeat & Learn

function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] dur-

ing repeat playback.

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Recording Your Performance

You can record up to 10 of your performances as User Songs. The recorded User

Songs can be played back on the instrument.

 Melody Tracks [1]–[5]

The melody performance in the right-hand area of

the keyboard will be recorded.

 Accompaniment Track [A]

The chord progression (for the Style) will be

recorded.

The operation is useful when you record a new Song

from scratch.

Make the desired settings including the

Main Voice selection.

Make the desired settings of your perfor-

mance.

• If you want to record only the melody performance, press

the [SONG] button.

• If you want to record the performance using a Style, press

the [Style] button.

Press the [REC] button to enter the

Record Ready mode.

If a User Song was not selected beforehand, this

operation selects the lowest-numbered unrecorded

User Song (from 101–110) as Recording target.

To exit from this status, press the [REC] button

again.

Start recording.

• When you press the [SONG] button in Step 2, play any note

to start recording.

• When you select a Style in Step 2, play a chord in the Auto

Accompaniment area to start recording with Style play-

back, or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording

only with playback of the Rhythm part of a Style.

The current measure will be shown on the display

while recording.

Press the [START/STOP] or [REC] button

to stop recording.

When using a Style, you can stop recording also

by pressing the [ENDING] button then waiting

until playback ends.

After recording finishes, “Writing!” appears indi-

cating that the recorded data will be stored, then

the recorded track numbers in the display will

light.

To play back the recorded Song, press

the [START/STOP] button.

• The Tabla/Tanpura performance cannot be recorded.

NOTE

Track Structure of a Song

Quick Recording

• The ACMP on/off status cannot be changed after the

[REC] button is pressed.

Tr a ck

Tra ck

Tr a ck

Tra ck

Accompaniment

Tr a c k

User 1

rEC

001

Flashes

NOTE

• Never attempt to turn the power off when “Writing!” is

shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash

memory and result in a loss of data.

User 1

rEC

003

Current measure number

NOTICE

Recording Your Performance

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

The operation here is useful especially when you want

to record the additional performances to an already

recorded Song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the

desired User Song (111–120) as the

recording target.

While holding down the [REC] button,

press the desired Track button to enter

the Record Ready mode.

 If you want to record only the melody:

While holding down the [REC] button, press

one of the [1]–[5] buttons.

 If you want to record only the Style play-

back:

Press the [STYLE] button, select the desired

Style, then simultaneously hold down the

[REC] button and press the [6/A] button.

ACMP is automatically turned on.

Same as in Steps 4 to 6 (page 28) in

“Quick Recording.”

Recording to a Specified Track

User 1

111

Song number

User 1

rEC

001

Track 1 will

flash

Press and

hold

User 1

rEC

001

Press and

hold

• If the memory becomes full while recording, an alert

message will appear and recording will stop automati-

cally. In this case, delete unnecessary data by using the

Clear functions (page 30), then execute the recording

again.

Limitations while recording

• The on/off status of ACMP cannot be changed.

• The Style number cannot be changed.

• When you use a Style, the following parameters

cannot be changed: Reverb Type, Chorus Type,

Time Signature, Style number and Style Volume.

• Performance with a Split Voice cannot be recorded.

NOTE

Recording Your Performance

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

You can clear all tracks of a User Song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the

User Song (111–120) to be cleared.

While holding down the track [A] button,

press the track [1] button for longer than

a second.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play.

Press the [+] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play. To cancel this operation, press the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the Song.

A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on

the display.

This lets you clear individual tracks from a User Song.

Press the [SONG] button, then select the

desired User Song (

111–120

From [1]–[5] and [A], press the Track

button to be cleared for longer than a

second.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play.

Press the [+] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play.To cancel this operation, press the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the track.

A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on

the display.

Clearing a User Song

Press and

hold

Hold for longer than

a second.

ClrUser1

YES

Clearing a Specified Track from

a User Song

Hold for longer than

a second.

ClrTr1

YES

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory

feature that lets you memorize your favorite

settings for easy recall whenever they’re

needed. Up to 32 complete setups can be

saved (eight banks of four setups each).

Make the desired settings such as those

for Voice, Style, and Tabla/Tanpura.

Press and release the [MEMORY/BANK]

button to call up a Bank number on the

display.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a Bank number.

While holding down the [MEMORY/

BANK] button, press one of the [1]–[4]

buttons to memorize the current panel

settings.

Press and release the [MEMORY/BANK] but-

ton to call up a Bank number on the display.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a Bank number.

Press one of the [1]–[4] buttons to call

up the panel settings you memorized.

The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears

in the display for a few seconds.

Freezing the Style settings even if a

different Registration number is selected

If you want to select different Registration Memory

setups without changing the Style settings or Tabla/

Tanpura settings, simultaneously hold down the

[VOICE] button and press the REGIST MEMORY

number button.

If you want to freeze the Style settings or Tabla/Tan-

pura settings permanently, set the Freeze mode param-

eter to ON from Function display 060 (page 50).

Up to 32 presets (eight banks of four each) can

be memorized.

Memory 1

8 Banks

Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4

Memorizing Panel Settings to

the Registration Memory

• Data cannot be saved to the Registration Memory during

Song playback.

• If you select a Registration Memory number that

already contains data, the previous data is deleted

and overwritten by the new data.

• Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings

to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may

be damaged or lost.

Bank

Bank number

NOTE

Writing!

Press and

hold

NOTICE

Recalling Panel Settings from

the Registration Memory

• When recalling the panel settings from the Registration Mem-

ory, make sure to press the same button—[STYLE] or [TABLA/

TANPURA]—corresponding to the mode used when you mem-

orize the panel settings. This is necessary since the mode sta-

tus (Style or Tabla/Tanpura) is not memorized to the

Registration Memory, meaning that it cannot be called up

even if you press the REGISTRATION MEMORY button.

• For details about the parameters that can be memorized to

Registration Memory, see the next page.

REGIST 1

IMPORTANT

Press and

hold

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Backup Parameters and Initialization

The following data will be maintained even if the

power is turned off and can be transferred then saved

to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single

Backup file. For instructions, refer to “Computer-

related Operations” (page 9).

• User Song data (page 28)

• Style data transferred from a computer and loaded to

Style numbers 207–211 (page 57)

• Registration Memory data (page 31)

• Function Settings (page 48):

Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Vol-

ume, Song Volume, Tabla/Tanpura Volume, Met-

ronome Volume, Grade, Demo Group, Demo

Play, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Your Tempo

on/off, Auto Power Off setting, Battery Select,

Freeze Mode

In addition to the Backup data above, all the Style data

(including data that have not been loaded) and all the

Song data will be maintained even if you turn off the

power.

This function erases the Backup data described above

and Song/Style data, then restores all the default fac-

tory settings. As required, execute one of the follow-

ing two procedures.

Backup Clear

This operation initializes the backup data.

While holding down the highest white key on the key-

board, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the

power on.

Flash Clear

This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that

have been transferred from a computer. Note that

Style data loaded to Style numbers 207–211 will be

maintained.

While simultaneously holding the highest white key

and the three highest black keys, press the [ ]

(Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.

Backup Parameters

Parameters that can be memorized to

Registration Memory

 Style settings*

Style number, ACMP on/off, Style volume, Track on/off

 Tabla/Tanpura settings**

Tabla number, Tabla/Tanpura volume, Section, Track on/off,

Volume balance between Tabla 1 and 2, Volume balance

between Tabla and Tanpura

 Voice settings

Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the

related Functions

Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the

related Functions

Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the

related Functions

 Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type

 Arpeggio settings

Arpeggio on/off and all settings of the related Functions

 Harmony settings

Harmony on/off and all settings of the related Functions

 Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Effect Combination

number, Split Point, Tempo, Pedal Function

* Available only when a Style is selected.

** Available only when a Tabla is selected.

Initialization

• Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you

have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a

computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For

details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 9).

NOTICE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Handy Performance Features

Selecting a Reverb Type

The Reverb effect lets you play with a rich concert

hall type ambience.

Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the

optimum Reverb type for the entire sound, you can

select a different Reverb type manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Reverb” (Function 034).

After “Reverb” is shown for a few seconds, the

current Reverb Type is shown.

Rotate the dial to select a Reverb type.

Play the keyboard to check the sound. For infor-

mation about the available Reverb types, refer to

the Effect Type List (page 80).

Selecting a Chorus Type

The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar

to many of the same Voices being played in unison.

Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the

optimum Chorus type for the entire sound, you can

select a different Chorus type manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Chorus” (Function 035).

After “Chorus” is shown for a few seconds, the

current Chorus Type is shown.

Rotate the dial to select a Chorus type.

Play the keyboard to check the sound. For infor-

mation about the available Chorus types, refer to

the Effect Type List (page 80).

• Some Songs and Styles use Reverb Types which cannot

be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style

is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display.

Adjusting the Reverb depth

You can adjust the Reverb depth applied to the

Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via

the same operations above. Regarding the

item in Step 2, refer to the Function List on

page 48.

Reverb

034

Hall2

034

Current Reverb type

NOTE

• Some Songs and Styles use Chorus Types which cannot

be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style

is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display.

Adjusting the Chorus depth

You can adjust the Chorus depth applied to the

Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via

the same operations above. Regarding the

item in Step 2, refer to the Function List on

page 48.

Chorus

035

Chorus1

035

Current Chorus type

NOTE

Reference

Handy Performance Features

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Pitch Controls—Transpose

The overall pitch of the instrument (except for the

Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down by a max-

imum of 1 octave in semitone increments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Transpos” (Function 004).

Use the dial to set the Transpose value

between -12 and +12.

Pitch Controls—Tuning

The overall tuning of the instrument (except for the

Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down between

427 Hz and 453 Hz in approximately 0.2Hz incre-

ments. The default value is 440.0 Hz.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Tuning.”

Use the dial to set the Tuning value.

Pitch Controls—the PITCH

BEND wheel

The PITCH BEND wheel can be used to add smooth

pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard.

Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward

to lower the pitch.

You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by

the wheel. Refer to “Pitch Bend Range” in the Func-

tion List (page 48).

Calling up Optimum Panel Set-

tings

You can call up optimum panel settings that are ideal

and stylistically appropriate for the current Song or

Style—with a single touch. If you don’t know what

settings are best with a selected Voice, for example,

use the following functions.

 To call up the settings for a Song or Style

(One Touch Setting):

Select Voice number “000 OTS.” In this status, select-

ing a Style or Song will call up the optimum panel set-

tings matching the current Song or Style.

Transpos

004

Tuning

005

440.0Hz

005

Handy Performance Features

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Changing the Touch Sensitivity of

the Keyboard

The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a

Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically and

expressively control the level of the Voices according

to your playing strength.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button

several times until “TouchSns” (Func-

tion 008) appears.

“TouchSns” is shown in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the current Touch Sensitivity is shown.

Use the dial to select a Touch Sensitivity

setting between 1 and 4.

When “1”–“3” is selected, higher values produce

greater (easier) volume variation in response to

keyboard dynamics—i.e. greater sensitivity. When

“4” (off) is selected, all notes will be played at the

same volume no matter how strongly or softly you

play the keys.

Selecting an EQ Setting for the

Best Sound

Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are pro-

vided to give you the best possible sound when listen-

ing through different reproduction systems—the

instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an

external speaker system.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button

several times until “MasterEQ” (Func-

tion 036) appears.

“MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the current Master EQ type appears.

Use the dial to select the desired Master

EQ type.

Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the

instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for

headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for lis-

tening via external speakers.

• The initial default Touch Sensitivity value is “2”.

TouchSns

008

Medium

008

Current Touch

Sensitivity

NOTE

• “Boost” produces a more punchy sound but may pro-

duce distortion depending on the Voice and Style, com-

pared to the other Master EQ types.

MasterEQ

036

Speaker

036

Current EQ type

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Voice Settings

Selecting a Dual Voice

Hold down the [DUAL] button for longer

than a second to call up “D.Voice.”

“D.VOICE” is shown for a few seconds, then the

current Dual Voice appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Dual

Voice .

Selecting a Split Voice

Hold down the [SPLIT] button for longer

than a second to call up “S.Voice.”

“S.VOICE” is shown for a few seconds, then the

current Split Voice appears.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Split

Voice .

Voice Editing

For each of the Main, Dual and Split Voices, you can

edit the parameters such as volume, octave and depth

of the Reverb and Chorus, allowing you to create new,

custom sounds that best suit your musical needs.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up the desired item.

Main Voice parameters are indicated as

“M.******,” Dual Voice parameters as

“D.******,” and Split Voice parameters as

“S.******.” For information about each parame-

ter, refer to the Function List on page 48.

Rotate the dial to set the value.

Check the sound by playing the keyboard.

Repeat Steps 2–3 above to edit various

parameters.

If necessary, memorize the settings to

the Registration Memory (page 31).

The Voice-related settings are reset when a differ-

ent Voice is selected. If you want to store the cre-

ated sound for future recall, memorize the settings

to the Registration Memory.

D.Voice

018

Syn.Str

093

018

Current Dual Voice

S.Voice

028

Strings

086

028

Current Split Voice

M.Volume

064

009

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Parameters Assigned to the Knobs

This section describes each of the parameters which can be assigned to the Knobs

(page 21).

z TABLA/TANPURA

Knob A adjusts the volume balance between the

sounds of Tabla 1 and 2, while Knob B adjusts the

volume balance between the sounds of Tabla and Tan-

pura.

x TABLA/TANPURA

Knob A adjusts the tempo of Tabla playback while the

Tanpura playback tempo is maintained. This follows

typical Indian music stylistic conventions. Knob B

raises or lowers the pitch of the Tabla/Tanpura sound

in semitones, with the exception of Tabla 1. This accu-

rately simulates the characteristics of the Tabla, in

which the lower sound is not affected by the tuning.

Note that also the pitch of Tabla 2 may not be changed

depending on the Tabla/Tanpura pattern.

c FILTER

Filter effects shape the sound by allowing only a spec-

ified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing

a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Fil-

ter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizer-

like sounds.

 Knob A: CUTOFF

Adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the

brightness of the sound. Turning the Knob to the left

makes the sound more muffled or darker, while turn-

ing the Knob A to the right makes the sound brighter.

 Knob B: RESONANCE

Adjusts the amount of Resonance applied at the fil-

ter’s cutoff frequency. Turning the Knob to the right

will increases the Resonance to emphasize the fre-

quencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strength-

ens” the perceived effect of the filter.

v EFFECT



Knob A: REVERB

Reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or

club. Turning the Knob to the right will increase the

Reverb depth.

 Knob B: CHORUS

Produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Turning

the Knob to the right will increase the Chorus depth.

b EG (Envelope Generator)

Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of

the sound varies over time. You can make the attack

faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a vio-

lin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or

shorten the sustain to best match the music you’re

playing.

 Knob A: ATTACK

Adjusts the Attack Time (the amount of time it takes

the sound to reach maximum level when a key is

played). Turning the Knob to the right will increase

the Attack Time, thus slowing down the attack rate.

• When Knob B is turned all the way left, only the pitch of the

Tabla 2 sound is raised abruptly by an octave. This is due to a

limitation in this instrument.

• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played

on the keyboard.

• Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass fre-

quencies.

NOTE

Level

Frequency

Cutoff Frequency

Frequencies in this

range are passed.

Frequencies in this

range are cut off.

• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played

on the keyboard.

Level

Frequency

Resonance

NOTE

AT TAC K

RELEASE

DECAY

Sustain Level

Level

Time

Key Played Key Released

Parameters Assigned to the Knobs

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

 Knob B: RELEASE

Adjusts the Release Time (the amount of time it takes

for the sound to decay to silence after a key is

released). Turning the Knob to the right will increase

the Release Time, thus make a longer sustain.

n STYLE FILTER

Same as “ c FILTER.” These effects are applied only

to Style or Tabla/Tanpura playback.

The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs.

Some Ideas for Using the Knobs

• These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played

on the keyboard.

NOTE

Number/Effect Try This

TABLA/TANPURA

Knob A adjusts the volume balance between the sounds of Tabla 1 (having the

lower sound) and Tabla 2 (having the higher sound of Tabla or Mridangam).

Knob B adjusts the volume balance between the sounds of the Tabla (assigned to

the [TABLA 1] and [TABLA 2] buttons) and Tanpura (assigned to the [TAN-

PURA 1]–[TANPURA 4] buttons). Play with these Knobs as the patterns loop,

sing along if you wish, and create your own performance.

TABLA/TANPURA

Knob A adjusts the tempo of Tabla/Tanpura playback. Setting to the minimum

left-most position results in half the default tempo, while setting to the maxi-

mum right-most position results in double the default tempo. The center position

corresponds to the default tempo. Note that the tempo cannot exceed the range

(11–280), and that the tempo of the Tanpura patterns will not change even if you

rotate Knob A. Knob B raises or lowers the pitch of the Tabla/Tanpura sound in

semitones. Regarding the Tabla, only the higher sound (assigned to the [2] but-

ton) will be transposed. Rotating the knob leftward lowers the pitch while rotat-

ing the knob rightward raises the pitch.

Use these knobs to set the desired tempo and key, sing along if you wish, and

create your own performance!

FILTER

Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (see the Voice List; page 61). Turn Knob B

all the way up and operate Knob A while playing for some spacey, floating

1980’s effects.

EFFECT

Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects

applied, and turn Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct”

sound of the voice. You can then turn the Knob A and Knob B settings up to add

extra impact and richness to the voice.

Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3

o’clock position. This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack

time is quite long so play the keys and hold them to let the sound come in fully.

Ideal for slow pieces.

STYLE FILTER

Select style 67, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback

(page 22). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The

overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized

for solid rhythmic impact.

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Arpeggio Settings

Synchronizing an Arpeggio to

Song/Style/Tabla Playback—

Arpeggio Quantize

When you play the keyboard to trigger an Arpeggio

(page 20) along with Song/Style/Tabla playback,

you’ll need to play the notes with correct timing to

keep the Arpeggio in synchronization with the other

playback tracks. However, your actual timing may be

slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both). The

“Arpeggio Quantize” function of this instrument will

correct any slight imperfections in the timing (accord-

ing to settings below), and then play back the Arpeg-

gio appropriately.

• Synchronizing at the quarter notes

• Synchronizing at the 8th notes

• No synchronization with Style or Song playback

Although the Arpeggio Quantize value is pre-pro-

grammed for each Arpeggio Type, you can change the

value manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Quantize” (Function 042).

After “Quantize” is shown for a few seconds, the

current Arpeggio Quantize value is shown.

Rotate the dial to select a value from

“OFF,” “1/8” and “1/16.”

• 1/8 Synchronizing at the quarter notes

• 1/16 Synchronizing at the 8th notes

• OFF No synchronization with Style or Song

playback

Holding the Arpeggio Playback

via the Footswitch

You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback

continues even after the note has been released, by

pressing the footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN

jack.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Pdl Func” (Function 063).

After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the

current setting is shown.

Rotate the dial to select “Arp Hold.”

If you want to restore the footswitch function to

sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both

hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus”.

Try playing Arpeggio with the foot-

switch.

Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then press

the footswitch. Even if you release the notes,

Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop Arpeg-

gio playback, release the footswitch.

Quantize

042

1/8

042

Current value

Pdl Func

063

Sustain

063

Current setting

Arp Hold

063

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns

Style Variations—Sections

Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song

you are playing.

INTRO

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the Intro finishes, Style playback shifts to the Main section.

The length of the Intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

MAIN

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. Playback of the Main section repeats indefinitely until

another Section’s button is pressed. There are two variations (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes

harmonically in response on the chords you play with your left hand.

AUTO FILL

This is automatically added before changing to Main A or B.

ENDING

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the Ending finishes, the Style playback stops automatically. The

length of the Ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Press the [STYLE] button, then rotate

the dial to select a Style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

ACMP on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.



Synchro Start

When the Synchro Start is on, Style playback will

begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompa-

niment range of the keyboard. To turn off the Syn-

chro Start, press the [SYNC START] button.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to

select Main A or Main B.

INTRO MAIN A/B

ENDING AUTO FILL

Appears when ACMP

is turned on.

Beat arrows flash.

MAIN A

Current Section

Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the

Intro section.

Play a chord with your left hand to start

playback of the Intro.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown

below). For information on how to enter chords,

see “Chords” on page 44.

After the Intro finishes, play the key-

board according to the progression of

the Song you are playing.

Play chords with your left hand while playing

melodies with your right hand, and press the

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The

Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

The Section switches to the Ending. When the

Ending is finished, Style playback stops automati-

cally. You can have the Ending gradually slow

down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing

back.

Synchro Stop

When you press the [SYNC/STOP] button to turn on

this function, the Style will only play while pressing

chords in the Accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Releasing all the notes will stop Style playback. This

makes it easy to add rhythmic breaks as you perform,

simply by releasing your hand from the Accompani-

ment range of the keyboard.

Turning on/off each Track via the [TRACK

CONTROL] button

INTRO≥A

Split Point

Accompani-

ment range

FILL A≥B

• Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously

for turning Tracks on or off.

NOTE

On/off status is shown in

the display (page 15)

ENDING

Appears when the

synchro-stop function

is engaged.

The style will play

while you are playing

the keys

Style playback will

stop when you

release the keys

Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Tabla/Tanpura Variations

Each Tabla/Tanpura features five Variations A–E via

the Tabla sound. These five variations can be alter-

nated via the [A]–[E] buttons during playback, allow-

ing you to add dynamic variations to the performance.

In addition, four phrase variations via the Tanpura

sound are provided commonly for all the Tabla/Tan-

pura patterns. These four variations can be alternated

via the TANPURA 1–4 buttons.

Unlike the Styles, the Tabla/Tanpura patterns do not

have the variations dedicated to the beginning or end-

ing of the Song, such as Intro and Ending.

The Tabla/Tanpura playback will continue until

stopped manually.

Changing the Tempo

A Style or Tabla/Tanpura can be played at any tempo

you desire—fast or slow.

Press the TEMPO [TAP] button to call up

the Tempo value in the display.

Rotate the dial to set a tempo from 011 to

280.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the default tempo of the

current Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song. You can change

the tempo during playback by pressing the TEMPO

[TAP] button just twice at the required tempo.

Tap Star t

You can start play back of the Tabla/Tanpura, Style or

Song by simply tapping the TEMPO [TAP] button at

the required tempo—four times for time signatures in

4 (4/4, etc.), and three times for time signatures in 3

(3/4, etc.).

Adjusting the Volume of the Style

or Tabla/Tanpura

You can adjust the volume balance between Style or

Tabla/Tanpura playback and keyboard performance.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “StyleVol” (Function 001) or

“TablaVol” (Function 003).

Rotate the dial to set the volume

between 000 and 127.

• The above operation applies also to Song or Arpeggio

playback tempo.

Tempo

090

Current Tempo value

NOTE

StyleVol

100

001

Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Setting the Split Point

The point on the keyboard that separates the left-hand

range and the right-hand range of the keyboard is

called the “Split Point.”

When a Style is selected and ACMP is on, the notes

played to the left of the Split Point are used to specify

the chord for Style playback. When the Split function

is on, the notes played to the left of the Split Point are

used to play the Split Voice.

The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the

F#2 key), but you can change it to another key.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “SplitPnt” (Function 007).

You can call up this display also by pressing the

[STYLE] then holding the [ACMP] button for lon-

ger than a second.

Rotate the dial to set the Split Point

between 036 (C1) and 096 (C6).

Playing Chords Without Style

Playback

If you press the [STYLE] button, press the [ACMP

ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on (the ACMP ON

icon appears), and play the chord in the Left hand

range of the keyboard (with SYNC START off), the

chord sound will be heard without Style playback.

This is referred to as “Stop Accompaniment.” The

specified chord will be shown in the display, and

affects the Harmony function (page 19).

• The Split Point set here is applied common to the Style

and Voice.

• During the Lesson playback, the Split Point cannot be

changed.

SplitPnt

054

007

Split Point

Split Point (54: F#2)

Split voice

Main voice

NOTE

PopBossa

132

Appears when auto accompaniment is on

Accompani-

ment range

Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Chord Types for Style Playback

For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful chords and

many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.

 indicates the root note.

• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:

m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2

• Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.

• When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown

on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played.

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three

fingers.

For root “C”

To play a major chord

Press the root note ()

of the chord.

To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

black key to the left of it.

To play a seventh chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

white key to the left of it.

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white and

black keys to the left of it (three

keys altogether).

Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Looking Up Chords Using the

Chord Dictionary

The Dictionary function is useful when you know the

name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how

to play it.

Press and hold the [CHORD DICT] button

for longer than a second to call up “Dict.”

This operation will divide the entire keyboard into

the three ranges as illustrated below.

• The range to the right of “ROOT ”:

Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no

sound.

• The range between “CHORD TYPE ” and

“ROOT ”:

Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no

sound.

• The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE ”:

Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in

the above two ranges.

As an example, learn how to play a GM7

(G major seventh) chord.

2-1.

Press the “G” key in the section to the right

of “ROOT ” so that the “G” is shown as

the root note.

2-2.

Press the key labeled “M7” in the section

between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT.”

The notes you should play for the specified

chord (root note and chord type) are conve-

niently shown in the display, both as nota-

tion and in the keyboard diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press

the [+]/[-] buttons.

Following the notation and keyboard

diagram in the display, try playing a

chord in the range to the left of “CHORD

TYPE .”

When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell

sound signals your success and the chord name in

the display flashes.

Dict.

Hold for longer than

a second.

Chord Type range Root range

Keyboard

playing range

Dict.

001

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually

indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers

to C major. However, when specifying major chords

here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the

root note.

Dict.

001

Chord name (root and type)Notation of chord

Individual notes of

chord (keyboard)

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Song Settings

BGM (Background Music) Play-

back

With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO/BGM]

button will play back only a few of the internal Songs

repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for

example, all internal Songs are played, or all Songs

transferred to the instrument from a computer are

played back, letting you use the instrument as a back-

ground music source. Five playback group settings are

provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs.

Hold down the [DEMO/BGM] button for

longer than a second.

“DemoGrp” is shown in the display for a few sec-

onds, followed by the current repeat playback tar-

get.

Rotate the dial to select a repeat play-

back group from the table below.

Press the [DEMO] button to start play-

back.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again.

Random Song Playback

The order of Song repeat playback via the [DEMO/

BGM] button can be changed between the numerical

order and random order.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons

several times to call up “PlayMode”

(Function 058).

“PlayMode” is shown for a few seconds, followed

by the current playback mode, “Normal” or “Ran-

dom.”

When the DemoGrp is set to “Demo,” this param-

eter cannot be set.

Rotate the dial to select “Random.”

To return to the numerical order, select “Normal.”

Press the [DEMO] button to start play-

back.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again.

Demo Preset Songs 001–003

Preset All preset Songs

User All User Songs

Download All Songs transferred from a computer

USB

All Songs (MIDI files) in the connected USB

flash memory

Hold for longer than

a second.

PlayMode

058

Song Settings

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Tempo Setting of the Song

This operation is same as that of the Style and Tabla/

Tanpura. Refer to page 42.

Tap Star t

This operation is same as that of the Style and Tabla/

Tanpura. Refer to page 42.

Song Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons

several times to call up “SongVol.”

Rotate the dial to set the Song volume

between 000 and 127.

Melody Voice Setting of the Pre-

set Song

You can change the Melody Voice of the current Pre-

set Song temporarily to any other desired Voice.

Press the [SONG] button, select the

desired Preset Song, then start play-

back.

Press the [VOICE] button, then rotate the

dial to select the desired Voice.

Hold down the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second.

After “SONG MELODY VOICE” is shown for a

few seconds, the Melody Voice of the Song will be

changed to that selected in Step 2.

• Song volume can be adjusted while a Song is selected.

SongVol

002

100

Song volume

NOTE

Strings

086

SONG MEL

Hold for longer than

a second.

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as

Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. Take a look at the Function List (pages 48–50).

When you find the desired Function you want to change, follow the instructions below.

Basic Procedure in the Function

Display

Find the desired item in the Function

List on pages 48–50.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons

several times until the desired item

appears.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

value of the selected function.

Some Function settings are maintained even if you

turn off the power, and can be transferred to the

computer as Backup Data (page 32).

Function List

StyleVol

100

001

Transpos

004

Current item

Direct

numeric entry.

Press simultane-

ously to recall the

default setting.

• Increment

value by 1.

•Execute

• Decrement

value by 1.

• Cancel

Function

Number

Function Display Range/Settings Default Value Description

Volume

001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 42.

002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 47.

003 Tabla Volume TablaVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 42.

Overall

004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 0 Refer to page 34.

005 Tuning Tuning

427Hz–453Hz

(in approximately

0.2Hz increments)

440.0Hz Refer to page 34.

006 Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 2

Sets the range over which you can control pitch by using the

PITCH BEND wheel (page 34), in semitone increments.

007 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 54 (F#2) Refer to page 43.

008 Touch Sensitivity TouchSns

1 (Soft), 2 (Medium),

3 (Hard), 4 (Off)

2 (Medium) Refer to page 35.

Main Voice (page 16)

009 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice.

010 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.

011 Pan M.Pan

000 (left)–64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the stereo pan position of the Main Voice. The value

“0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

012 Reverb Depth M.Reverb 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice's signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

013 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

014 Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 64

Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice reaches the Attack

level when the note is pressed. The larger the value, the faster the

attack rate. The smaller the value, the slower the attack rate.

The Functions

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

015 Release Time M.Releas 000–127 64

Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice falls to 0 when

the note is released. The larger the value, the longer the sustain.

The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain.

016

Filter Cutoff

M.Cutoff 000–127 64

Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 37) of the Main Voice.

017

Filter Resonance

M.Reso. 000–127 64 Determines the Filter Resonance (

page 37

) of the Main Voice.

Dual Voice (page 16)

018 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–753 * Selects a Dual Voice.

019 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

020 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.

021 Pan D.Pan

000 (left)–64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the stereo pan position of the Dual Voice. A value of

“0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

022 Reverb Depth D.Reverb 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

023 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

024 Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 64

Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice reaches the Attack

level when the note is pressed. The larger the value, the faster the

attack rate. The smaller the value, the slower the attack rate.

025 Release Time D.Releas 000–127 64

Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice falls to 0 when

the note is released. The larger the value, the longer the sustain.

The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain.

026

Filter Cutoff

D.Cutoff 000–127 64

Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (

page 37

) of the Dual

Voice.

027

Filter Resonance

D.Reso. 000–127 64 Determines the Filter Resonance (

page 37

) of the Dual Voice.

Split Voice (page 17)

028 Split Voice S.Voice 001–753 86 (Strings) Selects a Split Voice.

029 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice.

030 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.

031 Pan S.Pan

000 (left)–64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the stereo pan position of the Split Voice. A value of

“0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127”

results in the sound being panned full right.

032 Reverb Depth S.Reverb 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

033 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Effects

034 Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 ** Refer to page 33.

035 Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 ** Refer to page 33.

036 Master EQ Type MasterEQ

Speaker, Boost, Head-

phone, Line Out1, Line

Out2

1 (Speaker) Refer to page 35.

037 Wide Type Wide 1–4 4 (Wide Off)

Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type.

Higher values produce a greater Wide effect.

Harmony (page 19)

038 Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type.

039 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect

Arpeggio (page 20)

040 Arpeggio Type ARP Type 001–162 * Determines the Arpeggio type.

041 Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1(Original), 2(Thru) *

When “Thru” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are

determined by your playing strength. When “Original” is selected,

the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined by the original

setting regardless of your playing strength.

042 Arpeggio Quantize Quantize 1(OFF), 2(1/8), 3(1/16) * Refer to page 39.

Computer (USB TO HOST terminal)***

043 PC mode PC mode OFF/PC1/PC2 OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer

MIDI***

044 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the inter-

nal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your key-

board performance to the application software on the computer

via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.

Function

Number

Function Display Range/Settings Default Value Description

The Functions

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination.

** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Tabla/Tanpura.

*** For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 9).

045 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal

clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your key-

board performance to the application software on the computer

via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.

046 Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF ON

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via keyboard per-

formance are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO

HOST terminal.

047 Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Style play-

back are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO HOST

terminal.

048 Song Out SongOut ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Song play-

back are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO HOST

terminal.

049 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO -

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+]

to send, or press [-] to cancel. This operation should be done immedi-

ately after starting the Recording operation on the computer.

Metronome (page 18)

050

Time Signature

Numerator

TimesigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

051

Time Signature

Denominator

TimesigD

Half note, Quarter

note, Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

** Determines the length of each metronome beat.

052 Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson (page 26)

053 Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 1

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred

from a computer.

054 Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 2

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The

setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from

a computer.

055 Grade Grade ON/OFF ON Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

056 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON

This parameter is for Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON, play-

back tempo will change to match the speed at which you are play-

ing. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained

regardless of the speed at which you are playing.

Demo (page 24)

057 Demo Group DemoGrp

1 (Demo) / 2 (Preset) /

3 (User) / 4 (Down-

load) / 5 (USB)

1 (Demo) Refer to page 46.

058 Demo Play Mode PlayMode

1 (Normal)

2 (Random)

1 (Normal) Refer to page 46.

059 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is

set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/BGM]

button is pressed.

Registration Memory (page 31)

060 Freeze Mode Freeze ON/OFF OFF

When set to on, the Style related settings are maintained even if

you press another Registration Memory number button.

Auto Power Off (page 14)

061 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff

OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/

120 (min.)

30 minutes

Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is

automatically turned off.

Battery (page 12)

062 Battery Type Battery 1 (Alkaline) / 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument.

Pedal Function (page 20)

063 Pedal Function Pdl Func

1 (Sustain) /

2 (Arp Hold) /

3 (Hold+Sus) /

4 (Sostenut)

1 (Sustain)

Determines the function of the footswitch connected to the SUS-

TAIN jack (page 13). When “1 (Sustain)” or “4 (Sostenut)” is

selected, the footswitch works as a damper pedal or sostenuto

pedal as on an acoustic piano. Note that sustain does not affect

the Split Voice, while sostenuto affects only the Split Voice when

Split is on. When “2 (Arp Hold)” is selected, pressing the foot-

switch maintains Arpeggio playback even if you release the notes

(page 39). When “3 (Hold+Sus)” is selected, both the Arpeggio

Hold and Sustain functions are assigned to the footswitch.

Function

Number

Function Display Range/Settings Default Value Description

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

USB Flash Memory Operations

By connecting the USB flash memory device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, you can

save the data created on this instrument, such as User Song and parameter settings.

The saved data can be recalled to this instrument again for the future use.

IMPORTANT

• It is recommended to use the Power Adaptor when executing USB flash memory operations, since battery power may

not be reliable enough to last through these crucial operations. When you try executing certain functions, the “Use

Adaptor” indication may appear and the selected function cannot be executed.

Precautions when using the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB

device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB

device with care. Follow the important precautions

below.

 Compatible USB devices

The instrument does not necessarily support all

commercially available USB devices. Yamaha can-

not guarantee operation of USB devices that you

purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use

with this instrument, check the following web

page:

http://download.yamaha.com/

 Connecting USB flash memory

• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector

on the device is appropriate and that it is con-

nected in the proper direction.

• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that

the length is less than 3 meters.

• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1

standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0

storage device with the instrument. However,

note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1.

Using USB Flash Memory

By connecting the instrument to a USB flash mem-

ory, you can save data you’ve created to the con-

nected device, as well as read data from the

connected device.

 The number of USB flash memory to be used

Only one USB flash memory device can be con-

nected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

 Formatting USB flash memory

When a USB flash memory is connected, a message

may appear prompting you to format the device. If

so, execute the Format operation (page 53).

 To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with the

particular USB flash memory. If you are saving

data to the USB flash memory, make sure to dis-

able write-protect.

 Connecting/removing USB storage device

Before removing the USB flash memory from the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the

instrument is not accessing data (such as in the

Save and Delete operations).

• For more information about the handling of USB devices,

refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

• Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or

mouse cannot be used.

NOTE

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the USB flash memory you are for-

matting does not contain important data.

• Avoid frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB

flash memory too often. Doing so may result in the

operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up.

While the instrument is accessing data (such as during

Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mount-

ing the USB storage device (shortly after the connec-

tion), do NOT unplug the USB flash memory, and do

NOT turn the power off. Doing so may corrupt the data

on either or both devices.

NOTICE

USB Flash Memory Operations

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting a USB Flash Memory

Connect a USB flash memory to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful

to insert it with the proper orientation.

Wait until “USB” appears on the left cor-

ner of the display.

The “USB” indication confirms that the connected

USB flash memory has been mounted or recog-

nized.

Hold down the [FILE CONTROL] button

to call up the File Control display.



If “UnFormat” followed by “Format?”

appears:

This indicates that the connected USB flash

memory has not been formatted, and cannot be

mounted or recognized. Execute the Format

operation by following the instructions starting

with Step 2 on page 53.

Rotate the dial to call up the desired File

Control function, then execute it.

For details, refer to the table below.

Harmnum1

Load STY

Hold for longer

than a second.

Display File Control function Page

Load STY Loading a Style File 57

Load USR

Loading User Data from a

USB Flash Memory

Save SMF

Saving a User Song as SMF

to a USB Flash Memory

Save USR

Saving User Data to a USB

Flash Memory

Del SMF

Deleting a SMF File in a USB

Flash Memory

Del USR

Deleting a User File in a USB

Flash Memory

Format?

Formatting a USB Flash

Memory

Exit?

Exiting from a File Control

display

Messages may appear on the display during

File Control procedures to aid in smooth oper-

ation. Refer to the Message List on page 59

for details.

• No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played

while the file control display is showing, and only buttons

related to File Control operations will be active.

The File Control display cannot be called up in the follow-

ing situations.

• During playback of Style, Tabla/Tanpura, or Song

• When “USB” does not appear even if you have con-

nected a USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal.

NOTE

USB Flash Memory Operations

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Formatting a USB Flash Memory

The Format operation lets you prepare commercially

available USB flash memory for use with this instru-

ment is called “Format.”

Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for

longer than a second to call up the File

Control display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Format?.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Format

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears, and the “USER FILES”

folder will be created on the root directory in the

USB flash memory.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit

from the File Control display.

• The Format operation cannot be cancelled during

execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so

may result in data loss.

Format?

NOTICE

Recognizable file location in the USB

flash memory for Song playback (page 24)

• In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory

from a computer or other device, the data must be

stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory

or a first-level/second-level folder in the root directory.

Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a sec-

ond-level folder cannot be selected and played by this

instrument.

• If playback of an external Song (created via a different

instrument or computer) produces the distorted sound,

decrease the Song Volume (page 47) to reduce the dis-

tortion then adjust the Master Volume (page 14).

IMPORTANT

NOTE

Can be selected/

played.

Cannot be

selected/played.

USB flash memory (Root)

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

USB Flash Memory Operations

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving User Data to a USB Flash

Memory

The following data created on this instrument com-

prise the “User Data.”

• All 10 User Songs

• Styles which have been transferred from a com-

puter then loaded to Style numbers 207–211.

• All the Registration Memory settings

The User Data can be saved as a single “User File”

(.usr) to a USB flash memory.

Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for

longer than a second to call up the File

Control display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Save USR.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

As the target file name, “USER***” (***: num-

ber) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the

dial to select a different file name from

“USER001”–“USER100.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Save

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears, and a User file (.usr) will be

saved in a “USER FILES” folder which will auto-

matically be created on the USB flash memory.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit

from the File Control display.

• The extension (.usr) of the User File will not be shown on the

display of this instrument. Confirm the extension on the com-

puter display when connecting the USB flash memory to a

computer.

Overwriting existing files

If a file that already contains data is selected

as the target user file, an overwrite confirma-

tion message will appear.

NOTE

Save USR

USER001

• The Save operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so

may result in data loss.

• The amount of time required for this operation may vary

depending on the condition of the USB flash memory.

• If you want to recall the User file (.usr) to this instrument

again, execute the Load operation (page 56).

NOTICE

NOTE

USB Flash Memory Operations

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving a User Song as SMF to a

USB Flash Memory

A User Song can be converted to SMF (Standard

MIDI File) format 0 and saved to a USB flash mem-

ory.

Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for

longer than a second to call up the File

Control display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Save SMF.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

As the target User Song, “USER**” (**: number

1–10) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the

dial to select a different User Song from

“USER01”–“USER10” then press the [0/EXE-

CUTE] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

As the target file name on the USB flash memory,

“SONG***” (***: number 1–100) appears on the

display. If desired, rotate the dial to select the dif-

ferent file.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Save

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears, and a User Song will be

saved as the SMF format 0 in a “USER FILES”

folder which will automatically be created on the

USB flash memory.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit

from the File Control display.

SMF (Standard MIDI File) format

With this format, various events via the keyboard

performance such as note on/off and Voice selec-

tion will be recorded as MIDI data. The SMF For-

mat 0 and Format 1 are available. A large number

of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF For-

mat 0, and most commercially available Song file

(MIDI file) is provided in SMF Format 0.

Save SMF

User 1

SONG001

Overwriting existing files

If a file that already contains data is selected,

an overwrite confirmation message will

appear.

• The Save operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so

may result in data loss.

• The amount of time required for this operation may vary

depending on the condition of the USB flash memory.

NOTICE

NOTE

USB Flash Memory Operations

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Loading User Data from a USB

Flash Memory

A User data (page 54) saved as a User file (.usr) to the

USB flash memory can be loaded to this instrument.

Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for

longer than a second to call up the File

Control display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Load USR.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

“USER***” (***: number) appears on the display

as the User file name in the USB flash memory.

As desired, rotate the dial to select a different User

file.

Note that the User file should be saved in the

USERFILES folder on the USB flash memory.

Files saved outside this folder cannot be recog-

nized.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Load

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Check the loaded data by calling up the

User Song, one of the Styles 207–211,

and Registration Memory settings.

• Loading a User file will overwrite and erase the existing

data, including all 10 User Songs, Style data loaded to the

Style numbers 207–211, and all the Registration Memory

settings. Save important data you want to keep to a sepa-

rate USB flash memory before loading a User file.

• The Load operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so

may result in data loss.

NOTICE

Load USR

USER001

NOTICE

USB Flash Memory Operations

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Loading a Style File

Style data created on another instrument or a com-

puter can be loaded to the Style numbers 207–211,

and you can play them like the internal preset Styles.

The following two Load operations are available.

 Loading of a Style file (.sty) saved on the root

directory on the USB flash memory

 Loading of a Style file (.sty) transferred from a

computer via the Musicsoft Downloader and stored

in the internal memory of this instrument

Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for

longer than a second to call up the File

Control display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Load STY.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

A name of a Style file in the USB flash memory or

internal memory of this instrument will appear on

the display. As desired, rotate the dial to select a

different Style file.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***:

207–211) appears on the display. If desired, rotate

the dial to select a different number.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Load

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [STYLE] button, rotate the dial

to select a Style from 207–211, then try

playing it back.

• For instructions on transferring a Style file from a computer via

the Musicsoft Downloader, refer to “Computer-related Opera-

tions” (page 9). After data transfer, load the Style data to one

of the Style numbers 207–211 to enable playback.

• Loading a Style file will overwrite and erase the existing

data of the destination number. Save important data you

want to keep to a separate USB flash memory before load-

ing.

NOTE

NOTICE

Load STY

DiscoFox

FLA

• The Load operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so

may result in data loss.

Load To?

207

NOTICE

USB Flash Memory Operations

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Deleting a User File in the USB

Flash Memory

User Files (.usr) in the root directory of the USB flash

memory can be deleted.

Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for

longer than a second to call up the File

Control display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Del USR.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

As a User file name in the USB flash memory,

“USER****” (****: number) appears on the dis-

play. As desired, rotate the dial to select a different

User file.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Deleting a SMF File in the USB

Flash Memory

You can delete a SMF file that has been saved in the

USB flash memory via the Save SMF operation (page

55).

Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for

longer than a second to call up the File

Control display.

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Del SMF.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button.

As a SMF file name in the USB flash memory,

“SONG***” (***: number) appears on the dis-

play. As desired, rotate the dial to select a different

SMF file.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit

from the File Control display.

• The User file (.usr) to be deleted should have been saved in

the root directory of the USB flash memory. Files outside

this folder cannot be recognized.

• The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so

may result in data loss.

IMPORTANT

Del USR

USER001

NOTICE

• The SMF file (.usr) to be deleted should have been saved in

the root directory of the USB flash memory. Files outside

this folder cannot be recognized. This operation can be

applied only to file names with the “SONG***” (***: num-

ber) format.

• The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the

USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so

may result in data loss.

IMPORTANT

Del SMF

SONG001

NOTICE

USB Flash Memory Operations

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Exiting from a File Control display

To exit from the File Control display, press the

[VOICE], [STYLE], [TABLA/TANPURA], [SONG],

[FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button.

You can also exit from the File Control function mode

as follows:

Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to

call up “Exit?.”

Press the [0/EXECUTE] button to exit

from the File Control display.

Exit?

Message Comment

Can’t Use

Indicates that the file control function is cur-

rently unavailable since the media is being

accessed.

Complet.

Indicates the specified job completion such as

data saving and transmission.

Data Err

Displayed when the user song contains illegal

data.

Disk Ful

Displayed when saving data cannot be exe-

cuted since the media memory becomes full.

Error

Displayed when a file error or operational error

occurs.

File Ful

Indicates that SMF songs cannot be displayed

since the total number of files exceeds the

capacity.

no data There is no data to save in the flash memory.

no file

There is no file to load or delete from the

media.

Communication with the USB device has been

shut down because of the overcurrent to the

USB device. Disconnect the device from the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the

power of the instrument.

Protect

Displayed when trying to save or delete data

on a protected media, or format a protected

media. Set protect to off and try again.

UnFormat

Displayed when connecting an unformatted

media.

UseAdpt

USB flash memory save, delete, and format

operations cannot be performed when the

instrument is being powered from battery. Use

an AC adaptor.

0ur

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electri-

cal power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-

duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use

it further away from the instrument

The instrument is automatically turned off even if no

operation is done.

This is normal. This occurs due to the Auto Power Off function

(page 14).

The volume is too soft.

The sound quality is poor.

The Style/Tabla/Song/Arpeggio stops unexpectedly or

will not play.

The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel set-

tings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with com-

pletely new ones or completely recharged ones, or use the AC

power adaptor.

No sound is produced even when the keyboard is

played, or a Song, Style, or Tabla/Tanpura is being

played back.

Check whether a set of headphones or an audio cable is con-

nected to the PHONES/OUTPUT, or not. When such a connection

is made, no sound is output from the speaker of this instrument.

Check the on/off status of the Local Control (page 49). Normally,

set this parameter to ON.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo-

site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off

the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the foot-

switch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turn-

ing on the power.

No sound is produced even when playing keys in the

right hand area of the keyboard, although chords played

in the left hand area are recognized.

Check whether or not the Dictionary function (page 45) is used.

When used, this is normal.

Not all of the Voices seem to sound, or the sound seems

to be cut off, when playing the keyboard, Arpeggio, Style

or Tabla/Tanpura or Song.

You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum

polyphony (the maximum amount of notes that can be played

simultaneously) of this instrument. If the Main, Dual, and Split

Voices are being used along with playback of Arpeggio, Style,

Tabla/Tanpura or Song, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or

“stolen”).

The sound of the Voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The tone generation method uses multiple record-

ings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard;

thus, the actual sound of the Voice may be slightly different from

note to note.

The keyboard performance and playback of Style/Tabla/

Song produces an unexpected or inappropriate sound,

and cannot be restored to the normal status.

Using the Knobs can produce dramatic changes in the sound, but

may also produce unexpected or undesired sounds. If you want to

restore the original, normal sound before being changed by the

Knobs, change the Voice, Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song, or press

the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the panel settings.

The Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song does not start even

when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. The Arpeg-

gio does not start even when the note is pressed with the

Arpeggio turned on.

Check the on/off status of the External Clock (page 50). Normally,

set this parameter to OFF.

The volume of the Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song is too

low.

Check the volume setting in the Functions (pages 42 and 47).

The chords played in the left hand area cannot be recog-

nized even when the ACMP is turned on.

Check the Split Point setting (page 43). Set this to the appropriate

value.

Style parts other than the Rhythm part produce no

sound.

Check the on/off status of the ACMP (page 22). Make sure to turn

ACMP on.

The Styles numbered 194–206 produce no rhythm drum

sound even when the [START/STOP] button is pressed.

This is normal. Style numbers 194–206 have no rhythm parts, so

no rhythm will play. When one of these Styles is selected, turn

ACMP on, then specify the chord in the left hand area to play Style

parts other than the Rhythm part.

The ACMP indicator does not appear on the display

when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Check the on/off status of the [STYLE] lamp. When using a Style,

press the [STYLE] button to turn on the [STYLE] lamp.

Appendix

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Maximum Polyphony

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it

can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what

functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the avail-

able notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of

available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly

reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If

the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut

off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority).

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use

these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from

an external device.

• Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.” Since this

list uses a “1–128” numbering system, in such cases it is necessary to sub-

tract 1 from the transmitted program change numbers to select the appropri-

ate sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program change number 1.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes

have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held.

NOTE

Voice List

Panel Voice List

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

INDIAN

1 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed)

2 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed)

3 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed)

4 0 123 112 Shehnai

50123111Sarangi 1

60124111Sarangi 2

7 0 124 112 Pungi

8 0 117 74 Bansuri

90112105Sitar 1

10 0 113 105 Sitar 2

11 0 115 10 5 Sar od

12 0 97 16 Santur

13 0 114 105 Tanpura

14 0 116 117 Tabla

15 126 0 116 Tabla Kit 1

16 126 0 117 Tabla Kit 2

17 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1

18 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2

19 126 0 112 Animal Kit

PIANO

20 0 112 1 Grand Piano

*21 - - - Octave Piano

22 0 112 2 Bright Piano

23 0 112 7 Harpsichord

*24 - - - Octave Harpsichord

25 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano

26 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano

27 0 113 3 CP 80

*28 - - - Piano+Strings

*29 - - - Piano Pad

E.PIANO

30 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

31 0 113 6 Hyper Tines

*32 - - - Tiny Electric Piano

33 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano

34 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano

35 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano

*36 - - - EP Pad

37 0 112 8 Clavi

ORGAN

38 0 118 19 Cool! Organ

39 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ

40 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1

41 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2

42 0 112 19 Rock Organ

43 0 114 19 Purple Organ

44 0 112 18 Click Organ

45 0 116 17 Bright Organ

46 0 127 19 Theater Organ

47 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ

48 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ

*49 - - - Full Organ

50 0 113 20 Chapel Organ

51 0 112 20 Pipe Organ

52 0 112 21 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

53 0 112 22 Musette Accordion

54 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion

55 0 113 24 Bandoneon

56 0 113 23 Modern Harp

57 0 112 23 Harmonica

GUITAR

58 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar

59 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven

60 0 112 25 Classical Guitar

61 0 112 26 Folk Guitar

62 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar

*63 - - - Octave Jazz Guitar

64 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar

65 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar

66 0 112 28 Clean Guitar

67 0 113 27 Octave Guitar

68 0 112 29 Muted Guitar

69 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar

70 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar

BASS

71 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass

72 0 112 34 Finger Bass

73 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass

74 0 112 35 Pick Bass

75 0 112 36 Fretless Bass

76 0 112 37 Slap Bass

77 0 118 40 DX100 Bass

78 0 119 40 Ramp Bass

79 0 120 40 Dark Core Bass

80 0 119 39 Fat Lo Bass

81 0 122 40 Bleep Bass

82 0 121 40 Funk Bass

83 0 112 39 Synth Bass

84 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass

85 0 113 40 Dance Bass

STRINGS

86 0 112 49 String Ensemble

87 0 112 50 Chamber Strings

88 0 115 50 Marcato Strings

89 0 113 50 Slow Strings

*90 - - - Octave Strings

*91 - - - Orchestra Section

92 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings

93 0 112 51 Synth Strings

94 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings

*95 - - - Octave Pizzicato Strings

96 0 112 41 Violin

97 0 112 43 Cello

*98 - - - Strings Session

99 0 112 44 Contrabass

100 0 112 47 Harp

*101 - - - Octave Harp

102 0 112 106 Banjo

103 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit

*104 - - - Orchestra Hit & Timpani

105 0 96 105 Tambra

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

106 0 96 106 Rabab

107 0 98 106 Oud

108 0 0 107 Shamisen

109 0 97 106 Gopichant

1100 0108Koto

111 0 96 108 Taisho-kin

112 0 0 16 Dulcimer

113 0 97 108 Kanoon

114 0 96 16 Cimbalom

**115 - - - Tremolo Cimbalom

116 0 40 47 Yang Chin

**117 - - - Tremolo Yang Chin

CHOIR

118 0 112 5 3 C ho ir

119 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble

120 0 112 55 Air Choir

*121 - - - Grand Choir

122 0 112 54 Vox Humana

SAXOPHONE

123 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax

124 0 113 65 Sweet! Soprano Sax

125 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble

*126 - - - Ballroom Sax Ensemble

*127 - - - Jazz Section

128 0 112 67 Tenor Sax

129 0 112 66 Alto Sax

130 0 112 65 Soprano Sax

131 0 112 68 Baritone Sax

132 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

133 0 112 72 Clarinet

134 0 112 69 Oboe

135 0 112 70 English Horn

136 0 112 71 Bassoon

137 0 116 72 WoodWind Section

138 0 97 112 Hichiriki

TRUMPET

139 0 115 57 Sweet! Trumpet

140 0 112 57 Trumpet

141 0 112 58 Trombone

142 0 113 58 Trombone Section

143 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet

144 0 112 61 French Horn

*145 - - - Octave Horns

146 0 112 59 Tuba

BRASS

147 0 112 62 Brass Section

148 0 113 62 Big Band Brass

149 0 116 62 Octave Brass

*150 - - - Ballroom Brass

*151 - - - Jazz Brass Section

*152 - - - Orchestra Brass

153 0 113 56 Brass Hit

154 0 113 63 80s Brass

*155 - - - Fat Synth Brass

156 0 119 62 Mellow Horns

157 0 115 63 Funkey Brass

158 0 114 63 Techno Brass

159 0 112 63 Synth Brass

FLUTE

160 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute

161 0 113 76 Sweet! Pan Flute

162 0 112 74 Flute

*163 - - - Flute & Clarinet

164 0 112 73 Piccolo

165 0 112 76 Pan Flute

166 0 112 75 Recorder

167 0 112 80 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

168 0 104 82 RS Saw Lead 1

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

169 0 106 82 RS Saw Lead 2

170 0 114 84 RS Dist Lead

171 0 119 81 RS Dual Square

172 0 107 82 RS Ramp Lead

173 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw

174 0 119 85 RS Quack Lead

175 0 109 82 RS Dual Saw

176 0 105 82 RS Sync 1

177 0 119 88 RS Sync 2

178 0 112 81 Square Lead

179 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead

180 0 112 88 Under Heim

181 0 112 85 Portatone

182 0 115 82 Analogon

183 0 119 82 Fargo

184 0 112 86 Voice Lead

185 0 121 82 Funky Lead

*186 - - - Octave Lead

*187 - - - Wah Square Lead

*188 - - - Resonance Lead

*189 - - - Quack Lead

*190 - - - 5th Wah Lead

*191 - - - Super 5th Lead

SYNTH PAD

*192 - - - Dynamic Chime

193 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad

194 0 123 90 RS Synth Pad

195 0 113 92 RS Warm Pad

196 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance

197 0 124 90 RS Noise Pad

198 0 125 90 RS Tekno Man

199 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven

200 0 121 89 Dream Heaven

201 0 113 89 Symbiont

202 0 112 99 Star Dust

203 0 112 92 Xenon Pad

204 0 112 95 Equinox

205 0 112 89 Fantasia

206 0 113 90 Dark Moon

207 0 112 101 Brightness

208 0 113 101 Bell Pad

PERCUSSION

209 0 112 12 Vibraphone

210 0 112 13 Marimba

**211 - - - Tremolo Marimba

212 0 112 14 Xylophone

**213 - - - Tremolo Xylophone

214 0 112 115 Steel Drums

**215 - - - Tremolo Steel Drum

216 0 112 9 Celesta

217 0 112 11 Music Box

218 0 112 15 Tubular Bells

219 0 112 48 Timpani

**220 - - - Timpani Roll

DRUM KITS

221 127 0 88 Power Kit

222 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1

223 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2

224 127 0 9 Room Kit

225 127 0 17 Rock Kit

226 127 0 25 Electronic Kit

227 127 0 59 T8 Kit

228 127 0 60 T9 Kit

229 127 0 26 Analog Kit

230 127 0 113 Dance Kit

231 127 0 33 Jazz Kit

232 127 0 41 Brush Kit

233 127 0 49 Symphony Kit

234 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

XGlite Voice List

235 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2

236 126 0 21 Bass Drum Kit

237 126 0 22 Reverse Bass Drum Kit

238 126 0 125 China Kit 1

239 127 0 127 China Kit 2

240 126 0 37 Arabic Kit

241 126 0 41 Cuban Kit

ARPEGGIO

242 - - - Concerto

243 - - - Chambers

244 - - - Pizzicato Strings

245 - - - Latin Rock

246 - - - Brass Section 1

247 - - - Brass Section 2

248 - - - Funk Brass

249 - - - Piano Chord

250 - - - Piano Ballad

251 - - - Piano Arpeggio

252 - - - Hybrid

253 - - - Synth Sequence

254 - - - Guitarist

*255 - - - Strum

256 - - - Pickin'

257 - - - Spanish

258 - - - Synth Chords

259 - - - Funky Clavi

260 - - - Reggae Organ

261 - - - Harpeggio

262 - - - Analog Sequence

263 - - - Sawtooth

264 - - - Percussion Arpeggio

265 - - - Trill

266 - - - Club Beat

267 - - - R&B Loop

268 - - - Club Adds

269 - - - Samba

270 - - - Indian

271 - - - Arabic

272 - - - Finger Bass Left

273 - - - Combo Jazz Left

274 - - - Paul's Bass Left

275 - - - Trance Bass Left

276 - - - Acid Bass Left

277 - - - Piano Ballad Left

278 - - - Salsa Piano Left

279 - - - Piano Arpeggio Left

280 - - - Guitar Arpeggio Left

281 - - - Strum Left

282 - - - Teen Tal C

283 - - - Teen Tal F

284 - - - Teen Tal A

285 - - - Dadra D

286 - - - Dadra E

287 - - - Dadra G

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

XG PIANO

288 0 0 1 Grand Piano

289 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP

290 0 18 1 MellowGrPno

291 0 40 1 Piano Strings

292 0 41 1 Dream

293 0 0 2 Bright Piano

294 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP

295 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

296 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP

297 0 32 3 Detuned CP80

298 0 40 3 LayeredCP 1

299 0 41 3 LayeredCP 2

300 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano

301 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

302 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1

303 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP

304 0 18 5 MellowEP 1

305 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1

306 0 40 5 HardEl.Piano

307 0 45 5 Velocity Crossfade El.P 1

308 0 64 5 60's El.Piano 1

309 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2

310 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP

311 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2

312 0 33 6 DX EP Hard

313 0 34 6 DX Legend

314 0 40 6 DX Phase EP

315 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano

316 0 42 6 DX Koto EP

317 0 45 6 Velocity Crossfade El.P 2

318 0 0 7 Harpsichord

319 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP

320 0 25 7 Harpsichord 2

321 0 27 8 Clavi.Wah

322 0 35 7 Harpsichord 3

323 0 64 8 Pulse Clavi.

324 0 0 8 Clavi

325 0 1 8 Clavi KSP

3260658PierceClavi.

XG CHROMATIC

327 0 0 9 Celesta

328 0 0 10 Glockenspiel

329 0 0 11 Music Box

330 0 64 11 Orgel

331 0 0 12 Vibraphone

332 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP

333 0 45 12 Hard Vibes

334 0 0 13 Marimba

335 0 1 13 Marimba KSP

336 0 64 13 Sine Marimba

337 0 97 13 Balimba

338 0 98 13 Log Drums

339 0 0 14 Xylophone

340 0 0 15 Tubular Bells

341 0 96 15 Church Bells

342 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2

343 0 97 15 Carillon

XG ORGAN

344 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ

345 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ

346 0 33 17 60's Drawbar Organ 1

347 0 34 17 60's Drawbar Organ 2

348 0 35 17 70's Drawbar Organ 1

349 0 36 17 Drawbar Organ 2

350 0 37 17 60's Drawbar Organ 3

351 0 38 17 Even Bar Organ

352 0 40 17 16+2'2/3

353 0 64 17 Organ Bass

354 0 65 17 70's Drawbar Organ 2

355 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ

356 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 3

357 0 0 18 Percussive Organ

358 0 24 18 70's Percussive Organ

359 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ

360 0 33 18 Light Organ

361 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2

362 0 0 19 Rock Organ

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

363 0 64 19 Rotary Organ

364 0 65 19 Slow Rotary

365 0 66 19 Fast Rotary

366 0 0 20 Church Organ

367 0 32 20 Church Organ 3

368 0 35 20 Church Organ 2

369 0 40 20 Notre Dame

370 0 64 20 Organ Flute

371 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute

372 0 0 21 Reed Organ

373 0 40 21 Puff Organ

374 0 0 22 Accordion

375 0 32 22 AccordIt

376 0 0 23 Harmonica

377 0 32 23 Harmonica 2

378 0 0 24 Tango Accordion

379 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2

XG GUITAR

380 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar

381 0 16 25 Nylon Guitar 2

382 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3

383 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

384 0 96 25 Ukulele

385 0 0 26 Steel Guitar

386 0 16 26 Steel Guitar 2

387 0 35 26 12-string Guitar

388 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar

389 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

390 0 96 26 Mandolin

391 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar

392 0 18 27 Mellow Guitar

393 0 32 27 Jazz Amp

394 0 0 28 Clean Guitar

395 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar

396 0 0 29 Muted Guitar

397 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 1

398 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar

399 0 43 29 Funk Guitar 2

400 0 45 29 Jazz Man

401 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar

402 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch

403 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar

404 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar

405 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2

406 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics

407 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback

408 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2

XG BASS

409 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass

410 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm

411 0 45 33

Velocity Crossfade Upright

Bass

412 0 0 34 Finger Bass

413 0 18 34 Finger Dark

414 0 27 34 Flange Bass

415 0 40 34

Bass & Distorted Electric

Guitar

416 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass

417 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2

418 0 65 34 Modulated Bass

419 0 0 35 Pick Bass

420 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass

421 0 0 36 Fretless Bass

422 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2

423 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3

424 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4

425 0 96 36 Syn.Fretless

426 0 97 36 SmthFretless

427 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

428 0 27 37 ResonantSlap

429 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass

430 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2

431 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap

432 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1

433 0 18 39 Synth Bass 1 Dark

434 0 20 39 Fast Reso Bass

435 0 24 39 Acid Bass

436 0 35 39 Clavi Bass

437 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass

438 0 64 39 Orbiter

439 0 65 39 Square Bass

440 0 66 39 Rubber Bass

441 0 96 39 Hammer

442 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2

443 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass

444 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass

445 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass

446 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark

447 0 32 40 Smooth Synth Bass

448 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass

449 0 41 40 DX Bass

450 0 64 40 XWire Bass

XG STRINGS

451 0 0 41 Violin

452 0 8 41 Slow Violin

453 0 0 42 Viola

454 0 0 43 Cello

455 0 0 44 Contrabass

456 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings

457 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings

458 0 40 45 Suspense Strings

459 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings

460 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp

461 0 0 48 Timpani

XG ENSEMBLE

462 0 0 49 Strings 1

463 0 3 49 Stereo Strings

464 0 8 49 Slow Strings

465 0 24 49 Arco Strings

466 0 35 49 60's Strings

467 0 40 49 Orchestra

468 0 41 49 Orchestra 2

469 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra

470 0 45 49 Velocity Strings

471 0 0 50 Strings 2

472 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings

473 0 8 50 Legato Strings

474 0 40 50 Warm Strings

475 0 41 50 Kingdom

476 0 64 50 70's Strings

477 0 65 50 Strings 3

478 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1

479 0 27 51 ResoStrings

480 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4

481 0 65 51 Synth Strings 5

482 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2

483 0 0 53 Choir Aahs

484 0 3 53 Stereo Choir

485 0 32 53 Mellow Choir

486 0 16 53 Choir Aahs 2

487 0 40 53 Choir Strings

488 0 0 54 Voice Oohs

489 0 0 55 Synth Voice

490 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2

491 0 41 55 Choral

492 0 64 55 Analog Voice

493 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit

494 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

495 0 64 56 Impact

XG BRASS

496 0 0 57 Trumpet

497 0 16 57 Trumpet 2

498 0 17 57 BriteTrumpet

499 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet

500 0 0 58 Trombone

501 0 18 58 Trombone 2

502 0 0 59 Tuba

503 0 16 59 Tuba 2

504 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet

505 0 0 61 French Horn

506 0 6 61 French Horn Solo

507 0 32 61 French Horn 2

508 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra

509 0 0 62 Brass Section

510 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section

511 0 40 62 Brass Section 2

512 0 41 62 High Brass

513 0 42 62 Mellow Brass

514 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1

515 0 12 63 Quack Brass

516 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass

517 0 24 63 Poly Brass

518 0 27 63 Synth Brass 3

519 0 32 63 Jump Brass

520 0 45 63 Ana Vel Brass 1

521 0 64 63 Analog Brass 1

522 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2

523 0 18 64 Soft Brass

524 0 40 64 Synth Brass 4

525 0 41 64 Choir Brass

526 0 45 64 Ana Vel Brass 2

527 0 64 64 Analog Brass 2

XG REED

528 0 0 65 Soprano Sax

529 0 0 66 Alto Sax

530 0 40 66 Sax Section

531 0 43 66 Hyper Alto Sax

532 0 0 67 Tenor Sax

533 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

534 0 41 67 Soft Tenor Sax

535 0 64 67 Tenor Sax 2

536 0 0 68 Baritone Sax

537 0 0 69 Oboe

538 0 0 70 English Horn

539 0 0 71 Bassoon

540 0 0 72 Clarinet

XG PIPE

541 0 0 73 Piccolo

542 0 0 74 Flute

543 0 0 75 Recorder

544 0 0 76 Pan Flute

545 0 0 77 Blown Bottle

546 0 0 78 Shakuhachi

547 0 0 79 Whistle

548 0 0 80 Ocarina

XG SYNTH LEAD

549 0 0 81 Square Lead

550 0 6 81 Square Lead 2

551 0 8 81 LM Square

552 0 18 81 Hollow

553 0 19 81 Shroud

554 0 64 81 Mellow

555 0 65 81 Solo Sine

556 0 66 81 Sine Lead

557 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead

558 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2

559 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

560 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth

561 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth

562 0 20 82 Big Lead

563 0 24 82 Heavy Synth

564 0 25 82 Waspy Synth

565 0 40 82 Pulse Saw

566 0 41 82 Dr.Lead

567 0 45 82 Velocity Lead

568 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog

569 0 0 83 Calliope Lead

570 0 65 83 Pure Lead

571 0 0 84 Chiff Lead

572 0 64 84 Rubby

573 0 0 85 Charang Lead

574 0 64 85 Distorted Lead

575 0 65 85 Wire Lead

576 0 0 86 Voice Lead

577 0 24 86 Synth Aahs

578 0 64 86 Vox Lead

579 0 0 87 Fifths Lead

580 0 35 87 Big Five

581 0 0 88 Bass & Lead

582 0 16 88 Big & Low

583 0 64 88 Fat & Perky

584 0 65 88 Soft Whirl

XG SYNTH PAD

585 0 0 89 New Age Pad

586 0 64 89 Fantasy

587 0 0 90 Warm Pad

588 0 16 90 Thick Pad

589 0 17 90 Soft Pad

590 0 18 90 Sine Pad

591 0 64 90 Horn Pad

592 0 65 90 Rotary Strings

593 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad

594 0 64 91 Poly Pad 80

595 0 65 91 Click Pad

596 0 66 91 Analog Pad

597 0 67 91 Square Pad

598 0 0 92 Choir Pad

599 0 64 92 Heaven

600 0 66 92 Itopia

601 0 67 92 CC Pad

602 0 0 93 Bowed Pad

603 0 64 93 Glacier

604 0 65 93 Glass Pad

605 0 0 94 Metallic Pad

606 0 64 94 Tine Pad

607 0 65 94 Pan Pad

608 0 0 95 Halo Pad

609 0 0 96 Sweep Pad

610 0 20 96 Shwimmer

611 0 27 96 Converge

612 0 64 96 PolarPad

613 0 66 96 Celestial

XG SYNTH EFFECTS

614 0 0 97 Rain

615 0 45 97 Clavi Pad

616 0 64 97 Harmo Rain

617 0 65 97 African Wind

618 0 66 97 Carib

619 0 0 98 Sound Track

620 0 27 98 Prologue

621 0 64 98 Ancestral

622 0 0 99 Crystal

623 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp

624 0 14 99 Popcorn

625 0 18 99 Tiny Bells

626 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

627 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes

628 0 41 99 Clear Bells

629 0 42 99 Chorus Bells

630 0 64 99 Synth Mallet

631 0 65 99 Soft Crystal

632 0 66 99 Loud Glocken

633 0 67 99 Christmas Bel

634 0 68 99 Vibe Bells

635 0 69 99 Digital Bells

636 0 70 99 Air Bells

637 0 71 99 Bell Harp

638 0 72 99 Gamelimba

639 0 0 100 Atmosphere

640 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere

641 0 19 100 Hollow Release

642 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano

643 0 64 100 Nylon Harp

644 0 65 100 Harp Vox

645 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad

646 0 67 100 Planet

647 0 0 101 Brightness

648 0 64 101 Fantasy Bells

649 0 96 101 Smokey

650 0 0 102 Goblins

651 0 64 102 Goblins Synth

652 0 65 102 Creeper

653 0 66 102 Ring Pad

654 0 67 102 Ritual

655 0 68 102 To Heaven

656 0 70 102 Night

657 0 71 102 Glisten

658 0 96 102 Bell Choir

659 0 0 103 Echoes

660 0 8 103 Echoes 2

661 0 14 103 Echo Pan

662 0 64 103 Echo Bells

663 0 65 103 Big Pan

664 0 66 103 Synth Piano

665 0 67 103 Creation

666 0 68 103 Star Dust

667 0 69 103 Reso&Panning

668 0 0 104 Sci-Fi

669 0 64 104 Starz

XG WORLD

670 0 0 105 Sitar

671 0 35 105 Sitar 2

672 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar

673 0 97 105 Tamboura

674 0 0 112 Shanai

675 0 64 112 Shanai 2

676 0 96 112 Pungi

677 0 0 106 Banjo

678 0 28 106 Muted Banjo

679 0 0 109 Kalimba

680 0 0 110 Bagpipe

681 0 0 111 Fiddle

XG PERCUSSIVE

682 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell

683 0 96 113 Bonang

684 0 97 113 Altair

685 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs

686 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

687 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal

688 0 101 113 Asian Bells

689 0 0 114 Agogo

690 0 0 115 Steel Drums

691 0 97 115 Glass Percussion

692 0 98 115 Thai Bells

693 0 0 116 Woodblock

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

694 0 96 116 Castanets

695 0 0 117 Taiko Drum

696 0 96 117 Gran Cassa

697 0 0 118 Melodic Tom

698 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2

699 0 65 118 Real Tom

700 0 66 118 Rock Tom

701 0 0 119 Synth Drum

702 0 64 119 Analog Tom

703 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion

704 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal

XG SOUND EFFECTS

705 0 0 121 Fret Noise

706 0 0 122 Breath Noise

707 0 0 123 Seashore

708 0 0 124 Bird Tweet

709 0 0 125 Telephone Ring

710 0 0 126 Helicopter

711 0 0 127 Applause

712 0 0 128 Gunshot

713 64 0 1 Cutting Noise

714 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2

715 64 0 4 String Slap

716 64 0 17 Flute Key Click

717 64 0 33 Shower

718 64 0 34 Thunder

71964035Wind

720 64 0 36 Stream

721 64 0 37 Bubble

722 64 0 38 Feed

723 64 0 49 Dog

724 64 0 50 Horse

725 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2

726 64 0 56 Maou

727 64 0 65 Phone Call

728 64 0 66 Door Squeak

729 64 0 67 Door Slam

730 64 0 68 Scratch Cut

731 64 0 69 Scratch Split

732 64 0 70 Wind Chime

733 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2

734 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition

735 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal

736 64 0 83 Car Passing

737 64 0 84 Car Crash

738 64 0 85 Siren

739 64 0 86 Train

740 64 0 87 Jet Plane

74164088Starship

74264089Burst

743 64 0 90 Roller Coaster

744 64 0 91 Submarine

745 64 0 97 Laugh

74664098Scream

74764099Punch

748 64 0 100 Heartbeat

749 64 0 101 Footsteps

750 64 0 113 Machine Gun

751 64 0 114 Laser Gun

752 64 0 115 Explosion

753 64 0 116 Firework

• Selecting a Voice number between 242 and 287 will turn on Arpeggio.

• Selecting a Voice number with an asterisk (*) will turn on Dual.

• Selecting a Voice number with an asterisk (**) will turn on Harmony.

• These Voice numbers cannot be selected via MIDI messages from a

computer.

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

NOTE

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Drum Kit List

• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note is actually one or two octave(s) lower than keyboard Note (see Default Octave column). For example, in “222: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq

Click H” (Note C1) corresponds to (Note C0: Note# 24).

• Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.)

• Actual keyboard notes of 14 “Tabla” are one octave lower than the ones described in the list below. For example, the C4 sound in the following list is

actually played from C3.

Voi ce No. 14 15 16 17

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)

0/116/117 126/0/116 126/0/117 126/0/40

Keyboard MIDI

Tabla Tabla Kit 1

Alternate

Group

Tabla Kit 2

Alternate

Group

Indian Kit 2

Alternate

Group

Note#NoteNote#Note

25 C# 013C# -1

Baya ke / ge

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

26 D 0 14 D -1

27 D# 015D# -1

28 E 0 16 E -1 A Tabla na 6 A Tabla na 6

29 F 0 17 F -1 A Tabla tin 6 A Tabla tin 6

30 F# 018F# -1 A Tabla Center tin 6 A Tabla Center tin 6

31 G 0 19 G -1 A Tabla ti 01 6 A Tabla ti 01 6

32 G# 020G# -1 A Tabla ti 02 6 A Tabla ti 02 6

33 A 0 21 A -1 A Tabla ri 6 A Tabla ri 6

34 A# 022A# -1 A Tabla kat 6 A Tabla kat 6 Hateli Long

35 B 0 23 B -1 A Tabla tu 6 A Tabla tu 6 Hateli Short

36 C 1 24 C 0 Open Baya 7 Open Baya 7 Baya ge 1

37 C# 125C# 0 Mid Baya 7 Mid Baya 7 Baya ke 1

38 D 1 26 D 0 Press Baya 7 Press Baya 7 Baya ghe 1

39 D# 127D# 0 Bend Baya Slow 7 Bend Baya Slow 7 Baya ka 1

40 E 1 28 E 0 Bend Baya Fast 7 Bend Baya Fast 7 Tabla na 2

41 F 1 29 F 0 Click 7 Click 7 Tabla tin 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Open Click 7 Open Click 7 Tablabaya dha 1

43 G 1 31 G 0 G Low Tabla Tharang G Low Tabla Tharang Tabla tun 2

44 G# 132G# 0 G# Low Tabla Tharang G# Low Tabla Tharang Tablabaya dhin 1

45 A 1 33 A 0 A Low Tabla Tarang A Low Tabla Tarang Tabla di 2

46 A# 134A# 0 A# Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang Tablabaya dhe 1

47 B 1 35 B 0 B Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang Tabla ti 2

48 C 2 36 C 1 C Low Tabla Tarang C Low Tabla Tarang Tabla ne 2

49 C# 237C# 1 C# Low Tabla Tarang C# Low Tabla Tarang Tabla taran 2

50 D 2 38 D 1 D Low Tabla Tarang D Low Tabla Tarang Tabla tak 2

51 D# 239D# 1 D# Low Tabla Tarang D# Low Tabla Tarang Chipri

52 E 2 40 E 1 E Low Tabla Tarang E Low Tabla Tarang Kanjira Open 3

53 F 2 41 F 1 F Low Tabla Tarang F Low Tabla Tarang Kanjira Slap 3

54 F# 242F# 1 F# Low Tabla Tarang F# Low Tabla Tarang Kanjira Mute 3

55 G 2 43 G 1 G Low Tabla Tarang G Low Tabla Tarang Kanjira Bend up 3

56 G# 244G# 1 G# Low Tabla Tarang G# Low Tabla Tarang Kanjira Bend down 3

57 A 2 45 A 1 A Low Tabla Tarang A Low Tabla Tarang Dholak Open 4

58 A# 246A# 1 A# Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang Dholak Mute 4

59 B 2 47 B 1 B Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang Dholak Slap 4

60 C 3 48 C 2

Baya ka / ghe

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

C Tabla na 1 C Tabla na 1 Dhol Open 5

61 C# 349C# 2 C Ta b l a t i n 1 C Ta b l a t i n 1 D h o l M ute 5

62 D 3 50 D 2 C Tabla Center tin 1 C Tabla Center tin 1 Dhol Slap 5

63 D#

351D# 2

C Tabla ti 01 1 C Tabla ti 01 1 Dhol Slide 5

64 E 3 52 E 2 C Tabla ti 02 1 C Tabla ti 02 1 Mridangam Normal 6

65 F 3 53 F 2 C Tabla ri 1 C Tabla ri 1 Mridangam Open 6

66 F# 354F# 2 C Tabla kat 1 C Tabla kat 1 Mridangam Mute 6

67 G 3 55 G 2 C Tabla tu 1 C Tabla tu 1 Mridangam Slap 6

68 G# 356G# 2 D Tabla na 2 D Tabla na 2 Mridangam Rim 6

69 A 3 57 A 2 D Tabla tin 2 D Tabla tin 2 Chimta Open 7

70 A# 358A# 2 D Tabla Center tin 2 D Tabla Center tin 2 Chimta Normal 7

71 B 3 59 B 2 D Tabla ti 01 2 D Tabla ti 01 2 Chimta Ring 7

72 C 4 60 C 3

Tabla ne / na

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

D Tabla ti 02 2 D Tabla ti 02 2 Dholki Open 8

73 C# 461C# 3 D Ta b l a r i 2 D Ta b l a r i 2 Dh o l k i M u te 8

74 D 4 62 D 3 D Tabla kat 2 D Tabla kat 2 Dholki Slap 8

75 D# 463D# 3 D Tabla tu 2 D Tabla tu 2 Dholki Slide 8

76 E 4 64 E 3 E Tabla na 3 E Tabla na 3 Dholki Rim 8

77 F 4 65 F 3 E Tabla tin 3 E Tabla tin 3 Khol Open 9

78 F# 466F# 3 E Tabla Center tin 3 E Tabla Center tin 3 Khol Slide 9

79 G 4 67 G 3 E Tabla ti 01 3 E Tabla ti 01 3 Khol Mute 9

80 G# 468G# 3 E Tabla ti 02 3 E Tabla ti 02 3 Manjira Open 10

81 A 4 69 A 3 E Tabla ri 3 E Tabla ri 3 Manjira Close 10

82 A# 470A# 3 E Tabla kat 3 E Tabla kat 3 Jhanji Open 11

83 B 4 71 B 3 E Tabla tu 3 E Tabla tu 3 Jhanji Close 11

84 C 5 72 C 4

Tabla ne / tin

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

F Tabla na 4 F Tabla na 4 Mondira Open 12

85 C# 573C# 4 F Tabla tin 4 F Tabla tin 4 Mondira Close 12

86 D 5 74 D 4 F Tabla Center tin 4 F Tabla Center tin 4 Mridang Open 13

87 D# 575D# 4 F Tabla ti 01 4 F Tabla ti 01 4 Mridang Mute 13

88 E 5 76 E 4 F Tabla ti 02 4 F Tabla ti 02 4 Mridang Rim 13

89 F 5 77 F 4 F Tabla ri 4 F Tabla ri 4 Mridang Slide 13

90 F# 578F# 4 F Tabla kat 4 F Tabla kat 4 Khomokh Normal

91 G 5 79 G 4 F Tabla tu 4 F Tabla tu 4 Khomokh Mute

92 G# 580G# 4 G Tabla na 5 G Tabla na 5 Khomokh Mltatk

93 A 5 81 A 4 G Tabla tin 5 G Tabla tin 5 Madal-A2

94 A# 582A# 4 G Tabla Center tin 5 G Tabla Center tin 5 Madal-A#2

95 B 5 83 B 4 G Tabla ti 01 5 G Tabla ti 01 5 Madal-B2

96 C 6 84 C 5

Tabla ne / di

(Velocity 1-47 / 48-127)

G Tabla ti 02 5 G Tabla ti 02 5 Madal-C3

97 C# 685C# 5 G Tabla ri 5 G Tabla ri 5 Madal-C#3

98 D 6 86 D 5 G Tabla kat 5 G Tabla kat 5 Madal-D3

99 D# 687D#

5 G Tabla tu 5 G Tabla tu 5 Madal-D#3

00E 688E 5 Madal-E3

101F 689F 5 Madal-F3

102 F# 690F# 5 Madal-F#3

103G 691G 5 Madal-G3

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Voi ce No. 18 19

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128)

126/0/115 126/0/112

Keyboard MIDI

Indian Kit 1

Alternate

Group

Animal Kit

Note#NoteNote#Note

25 C# 013C# -1

26 D 0 14 D -1

27 D# 015D# -1 Hand Clap

28 E 0 16 E -1 Dafli Open

29 F 0 17 F -1 Dafli Slap 1

30 F# 018F# -1 Dafli Rim 1

31 G 0 19 G -1 Duff Open

32 G# 020G# -1 Duff Slap

33 A 0 21 A -1 Duff Rim

34 A# 022A# -1 Hatheli Long 2

35 B 0 23 B -1 Hatheli Short 2

36 C 1 24 C 0 Baya ge 3

37 C# 125C# 0Baya ke 3

38 D 1 26 D 0 Baya ghe 3

39 D# 127D# 0Baya ka 3

40 E 1 28 E 0 Tabla na 4

41 F 1 29 F 0 Tabla tin 4

42 F# 130F# 0 Tablabaya dha 3

43 G 1 31 G 0 Dhol 1 Open

44 G# 132G# 0 Dhol 1 Slap 5

45 A 1 33 A 0 Dhol 1 Mute 5

46 A# 134A# 0 Dhol 1 Open Slap 5

47 B 1 35 B 0 Dhol 1 Roll

48 C 2 36 C 1 Dandia Short 6

49 C# 237C# 1 Dandia Long 6

50 D 2 38 D 1 Chutki

51 D# 239D# 1 Chipri

52 E 2 40 E 1 Khanjira Open

53 F 2 41 F 1 Khanjira Slap

54 F# 242F# 1 Khanjira Mute

55 G 2 43 G 1 Khanjira Bendup

56 G# 244G# 1 Khanjira Benddown

57 A 2 45 A 1 Dholak 1 Open

58 A# 246A# 1 Dholak 1 Mute 7

59 B 2 47 B 1 Dholak 1 Slap 7

60 C 3 48 C 2 Dhol 2 Open Rooster

61 C# 349C# 2 Dhol 2 Slap 8

62 D 3 50 D 2 Dhol 2 Rim 8 Elephant

63 D# 351D# 2 Mridangam na 9

64 E 3 52 E 2 Mridangam din 9 Horse

65 F 3 53 F 2 Mridangam ki 9 Cricket

66 F# 35

4F# 2 Mridangam ta 9

67 G 3 55 G 2 Mridangam Chapu 9 Cow

68 G# 356G# 2 Mridangam Lo Closed 10

69 A 3 57 A 2 Mridangam Lo Open 10 Tiger

70 A# 358A# 2 Chimta Normal 11

71 B 3 59 B 2 Chimta Ring 11 Rattlesnake

72 C 4 60 C 3 Dholki Hi Open 12 Monkeies

73 C# 461C# 3 Dholki Hi Mute 12

74 D 4 62 D 3 Dholki Lo Open 13 Crow

75 D# 463D# 3 Dholki Hi Slap 12

76 E 4 64 E 3 Dholki Lo Slide 13

77 F 4 65 F 3 Khol Open 14

78 F# 466F# 3 Khol Slide

79 G 4 67 G 3 Khol Mute 14

80 G# 468G# 3 Manjira Open 15

81 A 4 69 A 3 Manjira Close 15

82 A# 470A# 3 Jhanji Open 16

83 B 4 71 B 3 Jhanji Close 16

84 C 5 72 C 4 Mondira Open 17

85 C# 573C# 4 Mondira Close 17

86 D 5 74 D 4 Bhangra Scat 1

87 D# 575D# 4 Bhangra Scat 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Bhangra Scat 3

89 F 5 77 F 4 Bhangra Scat 4

90 F# 578F# 4Khomokh Normal

91 G 5 79 G 4 Khomokh Mute

92 G# 580G# 4 Khomokh Mltatk

93 A 5 81 A 4 Thavil Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Thavil Slap

95 B 5 83 B 4 Thavil Mute

96 C 6 84 C 5 Khartaal

97 C# 685C# 5 Dholak 2 Open 18

98 D 6 86 D 5 Dholak 2 Slide 18

99 D# 687D# 5 Dholak 2 Rim 1

100E 688E 5Dholak 2 Rim 2

101F 689F 5Dholak 2 Ring

102 F# 690F# 5 Dholak 2 Slap

103G 691G 5Dholak 2 Body

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Voice No. 221 222 223 224 225

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/088 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Power Kit Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit

Note#NoteNote#Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3

Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Power 1 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy

44 G# 132G# 0

Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Amb+ Kick Soft

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Power 1 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Short

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Power Open Kick Tight Kick 2

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Power Closed Kick Kick Short

Kick Gate

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Power Side Stick Side Stick Light

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Power Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap Power Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Rough Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Tight

53 F 2 41 F 1 Tom Power 1 Floor Tom L

Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1

54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Power Hi-Hat Closed

55 G 2 43 G 1 Tom Power 2 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2

56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Power Hi-Hat Pedal

57 A 2 45 A 1 Tom Power 3 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3

58 A# 246A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Power Hi-Hat Open

59 B 2 47 B 1 Tom Power 4 Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Tom Power 5 Mid Tom H

Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal Acoustic 1 Crash Cymbal 1

62 D 3 50 D 2 Tom Power 6 High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal Acoustic 1 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Acoustic Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Acoustic Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Acoustic Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal Acoustic 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal Acoustic 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 6 2 D 3 Conga H Mute

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

92 G# 580G# 42 Tri a n g l e M u t e

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100E 688E 5

101F 689F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103G 691G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Voice No. 222 226 227 228 229

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/025 127/000/059 127/000/060 127/000/026

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Electronic Kit T8 Kit T9 Kit Analog Kit

Note#NoteNote#Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap Snare Hammer Snare Drum&Bass 1

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise Kick ZapHard Kick Break 2

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click Snare Garg L Snare Distortion

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell Kick TekPower Kick TekPower

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L Kick Slimy Kick Distortion RM

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H Kick T8 1 Kick T9 2

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap Snare Analog CR Snare Analog CR

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl Snare T8 4 Snare T9 5

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap Snare Clap Analog Clap Analog Sm

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Snare T8 3 Snare T9 Gate Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

Tom T8 5 Snare Rock Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Snare T8 5 Snare T9 3 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Snappy Electro Kick T8 3 Snare T9 4 Snare Noisy 4

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

Snare T8 4 Snare T9 Gate

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick 3 Kick T8 2 Kick T9 4 Kick 3

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot

Snare T8 3 Snare T9 5

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Gate T8 Kick Bass Kick T9 1 Kick Analog Short

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Gate Heavy Kick T8 1 Kick T9 3 Kick Analog

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick

Snare T8 Rim Snare T9 Rim Side Stick Analog

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Noisy 2 Snare T8 2 Snare T9 1 Snare Analog

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

Clap T9 Clap T9

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Noisy 3 Snare T8 1 Snare T9 2 Snare Analog 2

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Electro 1 Tom T8 1 Tom T9 1 Tom Analog 1

54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed T8 2 Hi-Hat Closed T9 Hi-Hat Closed Analog

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Electro 2 Tom T8 2 Tom T9 2 Tom Analog 2

56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Open T8 1 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Electro 3 Tom T8 3 Tom T9 3 Tom Analog 3

58 A# 246A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Open T8 1 Hi-Hat Open T9 Hi-Hat Open Analog

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Electro 4 Tom T8 4 Tom T9 4 Tom Analog 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Electro 5 Tom T8 6 Tom T9 5 Tom Analog 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1

Crash T8 Crash T9 Crash Analog

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Electro 6 Tom T8 7 Tom T9 6 Tom Analog 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

Ride T9 Ride T9

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal 2 Chinese Cymbal 2

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup 2 Ride Cymbal Cup 2

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Tambourine RX5 Tambourine RX5

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Crash Cymbal 3

68 G# 356G# 2Cowbell Cowbell T8 Cowbell 1 Cowbell Analog

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

Crash Cymbal 4 Crash Cymbal 4

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap Cowbell T8

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 3 Ride Cymbal 3

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Conga T8 5 Conga T8 5

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Conga T8 4 Conga T8 4

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga T8 3 Conga Tip Conga Analog H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

Conga T8 2 Conga Open Slap Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

Conga T8 1 Conga Open Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H Glass H Analog Click

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Glass L Conga T8 1

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas T8 Maracas Slur Maracas 2

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

FxGun 2 FxGun 2

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L FxGun 1 FxGun 1

85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short Analog Shaker H Scratch H 2

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long Analog Shaker L Scratch Down

87 D# 575D# 4Claves Clave T8 Hi Q 3 Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

Hi Q 1 Hi Q 1

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch L Scratch L Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2

92 G# 580G# 4 2 Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4Shaker Analog Shaker Analog Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells Sleigh Bell Sleigh Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Wind Chime Wind Chime

97 C# 685C# 5 Snare Hip 1 Snare Piccolo

98 D 6 86 D 5 Snare Hip 2 Snare T8 5

99 D# 687D# 5 Snare Hip Gate Snare Rock Roll Distortion

100E 688E 5 Snare Break 1 Snare Brush Mute

101F 689F 5 Kick Blip Kick Blip Hard

102 F# 690F# 5 Snare FX 1 Snare Jungle 1

103G 691G 5 Kick FxHammer Kick Sustain

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

230 231 232 233 234 235

127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002

Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 *

Reverse Cymbal

Hi Q 2

Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2

Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2

Rim Gate

Open Rim Shot Light

Kick Techno L Gran Cassa

Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call

Side Stick Analog Stick Light Stick Light

Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam

String Slap Scratch Cut

Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3

Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime

Hi-Hat Closed Analog3

Telephone Ring 2

Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4

Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3

Hi-Hat Open Analog 2

Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4

Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5

Crash Analog

Hand Cymbal

Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6

Hand Cymbal Short

Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition

Car Tires Squeal

Car Passing

Car Crash

Cowbell Analog

Siren

Hand Cymbal 2 Train

Jet Plane

Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship

Burst

Roller Coaster

Conga Analog H

Submarine

Conga Analog M

Conga Analog L

Shower Laugh

Thunder Scream

Maracas 2

Wind Punch

Stream Heartbeat

Bubble Footeps

Feed

Claves 2

Scratch H 2

Scratch L 3

Dog Machine Gun

TurnTableNoise Horse Laser Gun

Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

Firework

Maou

* Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list below.

Drum Kit List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Voice No. 222 236 237 238

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 126/000/021 126/000/022 126/000/125

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Bass Drum Kit Reverse Bass Drum Kit China Kit 1

Alternate

Group

Note#NoteNote#Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute BD Electro Reverse BD Electro

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open BD FX Gate Reverse BD FX Gate

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q BD Hammer Reverse BD Hammer

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap BD Analog Power Reverse BD Analog Power

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H BD Analog Distortion 5

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L BD Analog Distortion 6 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 6

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap BD Analog Distortion 4

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise BD Analog Distortion 3 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 3

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click BD Analog Distortion 2 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 2

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell BD Analog Tight Reverse BD Analog Tight

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L BD Analog 94 Reverse BD Analog 94 Da Cha

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H BD Analog Blip 2 Reverse BD Analog Blip 2 Da Gu mp 2

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap BD Analog Rubber 2 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 2 Da Gu rim

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl BD Analog 93 Reverse BD Analog 93 Da Gu f 2

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap BD Analog 90 Reverse BD Analog 90 Da Gu hand 2

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl BD Analog 83 Reverse BD Analog 83 Da Gu roll 2

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog 82 Pai Gu 4

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet BD Analog 92 Pai Gu 4 High

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft BD Analog 91 Reverse BD Analog 91 Pai Gu 3

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks BD Analog Deep Reverse BD Analog Deep Pai Gu 3 High

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft BD Analog Hard 2 Pai Gu 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot BD Analog Hard 1 Reverse BD Analog Hard 1 Pai Gu 2 High

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight BD Analog Blip 1 Reverse BD Analog Blip 1 Pai Gu 1

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick BD Analog Rubber 1 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 1 Luo High 1

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick BD Analog Loose Reverse BD Analog Loose Gong batter

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare BD Synth 1 Reverse BD Synth 1 Jin Luo

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap BD Synth 2 Reverse BD Synth 2 Luo High 2

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight BD Analog Distortion 1 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 1 Luo Mid-Low

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Ripper Reverse Ripper Luo

54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed BD Analog 70 L Jin Luo Low 5

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H BD Analog 70 Reverse BD Analog 70 Da Cha 5

56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal BD Analog 80 Reverse BD Analog 81 Da Cha effect 5

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom BD Analog 80 Long Zhong Cha

58 A# 246A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open BD Dry Reverse BD Dry Xiao Cha effect 1

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L BD Dry Hard Xiao Cha 1

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H BD Room 1 Mang Luo Low

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 BD Soft Reverse BD Soft Mang Luo Mid

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom BD Room 2 Reverse BD Room 2 Qing

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 BD Break Lo-fi 2 Reverse BD Break Lo-fi 2 Finger Bell

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal BD Break Lo-fi 1 Reverse BD Break Lo-fi 1 Luo big

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup BD & Hi-Hat Open Reverse BD & Hi-Hat Open Mu Yu Low

66 F#

354F# 2

Tambourine BD Jungle 2 Mu Yu Mid-Low

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal BD Jungle 1 Mu Yu Mid

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell BD Jungle 3 Reverse BD Jungle 3 Mu Yu High

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 BD D&B 1 Reverse BD D&B 1 Nan Bang Zi roll 3

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap BD D&B 2 Reverse BD D&B 2 Nan Bang Zi 3

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 BD RX5 1 Reverse BD RX5 1 Ban Gu 4

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H BD RX5 2 Reverse BD RX5 2 Ban 4

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L BD Room 3 Reverse BD Room 3 Ban Gu roll 4

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute BD Power Gate Reverse BD Power Gate Chinese Opera Voice 1

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open BD R&B 1 Reverse BD R&B 1 Chinese Opera Voice 2

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L BD R&B 2 Reverse BD R&B 2 Chinese Opera Voice 3

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H BD Lo-fi Reverse BD Lo-fi Yun Luo F4

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L BD Hip Deep Yun Luo F#4

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H BD Break Deep Reverse BD Break Deep Yun Luo G4

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L BD Break Heavy Reverse BD Break Heavy Yun Luo G#4

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa BD Break Hard Reverse BD Break Hard Yun Luo A4

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Big Drum Reverse Big Drum Yun Luo A#4

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Taiko Drum Reverse Taiko Drum Yun Luo B4

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Surdo Open Reverse Surdo Open Yun Luo C5

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feet 2 Reverse Feet 2 Yun Luo C#5

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long BD Industrial Reverse Tom Industrial Yun Luo D5

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Door Slam Reverse Door Slam Yun Luo D#5

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H Punch Reverse Punch Yun Luo E5

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L Heart Yun Luo F5

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Feet 1 Reverse Feet 1 Yun Luo F#5

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open BD Human Reverse BD Human Yun Luo G5

92 G# 580G# 4 2 Triangle Mute BD Human Deep Reverse BD Human Deep Yun Luo G#5

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open Vox Buh! Reverse Vox Buh! Yun Luo A5

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker Vox Muh! Reverse Vox Muh! Yun Luo A#5

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells Yun Luo B5

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Yun Luo C6

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100E 688E 5

101F 689F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103G 691G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

239 240 241

127/000/127 126/000/037 126/000/041

China Kit 2

Alternate

Group

Arabic Kit * Cuban Kit

Zarb Back mf

Zarb Tom f

Zarb Eshareh

Zarb Whipping

Tom ba k To m f

Neghareh Tom f

Tom ba k B a c k f

Neghareh Back f

Tom ba k S n a p f

Neghareh Pelang f Conga H Tip

Tombak Trill Conga H Heel

Khaligi Clap 1 Conga H Open

Arabic Zalgouta Open Conga H Mute

Khaligi Clap 2 Conga H Slap Open

Arabic Zalgouta Close Conga H Slap

Arabic Hand Clap Conga H Slap Mute

Tabel Tak 1 Conga L Tip

Sagat 1 Conga L Heel

Tabel Dom Conga L Open

Sagat 2 Conga L Mute

Tabel Tak 2 Conga L Slap Open

Sagat 3 Conga L Slap

Riq Tik 3 Conga L Slide

Riq Tik 2 Bongo H Open 1 finger

Riq Tik Hard 1 Bongo H Open 3 finger

Riq Tik 1 Bongo H Rim

Riq Tik Hard 2 Bongo H Tip

Riq Tik Hard 3 Bongo H Heel

Riq Tish Bongo H Slap

Riq Snouj 2 Bongo L Open 1 finger

Riq Roll Bongo L Open 3 finger

Riq Snouj 1 Bongo L Rim

Riq Sak Bongo L Tip

Riq Snouj 3 Bongo L Heel

Riq Snouj 4 Bongo L Slap

Riq Tak 1 Timbale L Open

Riq Brass 1

Riq Tak 2

Riq Brass 2

Riq Dom

Katem Tak Doff Paila L

Katem Dom Timbale H Open

Katem Sak 1

Katem Tak 1

Katem Sak 2

Katem Tak 2

Daholla Sak 2 Paila H

Daholla Sak 1 Cowbell Top

Daholla Tak 1

Daholla Dom

Daholla Tak 2

Tablah Prok Guiro Short

Tablah Dom 2 Guiro Long

Tablah Roll of Edge

Dagu Mute 4 Tablah Tak Finger 4

Zhongcha Mute 5 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tambourine

Dagu Heavy 4 Tablah Tak Finger 3

Zhongcha Open 5 Tablah Tak Trill 2

Paigu Middle Tablah Tak Finger 2

Paigu Low Tablah Tak Finger 1 Maracas

Xiaocha Mute 6 Tablah Tik 2 Shaker

Bangu Tablah Tik 4 Cabasa

Xiaocha Open 6 Tablah Tik 3

Bangzi Tablah Tik 1

Muyu Low Tablah Tak 3

Zhongluo Mute 7 Tablah Tak 1

Muyu Mid-Low Tablah Tak 4

Zhongluo Open 7 Tablah Tak 2

Muyu Middle Tablah Sak 2

Xiaoluo Open Tablah Tremolo

Triangle Mute 8 Tablah Sak 1

Triangle Open 8 Tablah Dom 1

* Actual keyboard notes of the Arabic Kit are one octave higher than the ones described in the list below.

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Style List

Style No. Style Name

INDIAN

1 Bhajan

2Bolly 1

3Bolly 2

4Bolly 3

5Bolly 4

6 Indy Pop

7 Hind Bld

8 IndyWlz1

9 IndyWlz2

10 Bhangra1

11 Bhangra2

12 Boliyan

13 BaleBale

14 IndyDnc1

15 IndyDnc2

16 Tamil

17 Kerala

18 Goa Grv

19 Goan Pop

20 Rajsthan

21 Dandiya

22 MdrnQwal

23 Qawwali

8BEAT

24 BritRock

25 8BtModrn

26 Cool 8Bt

27 60sGtPop

28 8BtAdria

29 60s8Beat

30 BblgumPp

31 BritPpSw

32 8Beat

33 Off Beat

34 60s Rock

35 HardRock

36 RockShfl

37 8Bt Rock

16BEAT

38 16Beat

39 PopShf 1

40 PopShf 2

41 Gtr Pop

42 16Bt Up

43 KoolShfl

44 JazzRock

45 HH Light

BALLAD

46 Glam Pno

47 Gtr Bld

48 PianoBld

49 LoveSong

50 68Modern

51 68SlowRk

52 68OrcBld

53 OrganBld

54 Pop Bld

55 16Bld 1

56 16Bld 2

DANCE

57 AgagBeat

58 CoastDnc

59 ClubBeat

60 Electron

61 FunkyHse

62 ChartR&B

63 MellowHH

64 Soul R&B

65 Soul Bld

66 Chillout

67 EuTrance

68 Ibiza

69 DreamDnc

70 NewHipHp

71 Pop R&B

72 TrancPop

73 ChartPop

74 HouseMsk

75 Swing H

76 TcnPolis

77 Clubdanc

78 Club Ltn

79 Garage 1

80 Garage 2

81 TcnParty

82 UK Pop

83 HHGroove

84 Hip Shfl

85 HipHopPp

DISCO

86 ModDisco

87 70sDsc 1

88 70sDsc 2

89 LatinDsc

90 DscPhily

91 SatNight

92 DscChoco

93 DscHands

SWING&JAZZ

94 BB Fast

95 BBMedium

96 BBBallad

97 BB Shfl

98 AcousJaz

99 AcidJazz

100 JazzClub

101 Swing 1

102 Swing 2

103 OrchSwng

104 FiveFour

105 Jazz Bld

106 Dixie

107 Ragtime

108 AfroCubn

109 Charlstn

R&B

110 Blues Rk

111 Soul

112 D et Po p 1

113 60s R&R

114 6/8 Soul

115 M od r nR &B

116 C ro Twi st

117 R ck &Ro ll

118 D et Po p 2

119 Boogie 1

120 Boogie 2

Style No. Style Name

121 6/8Blues

COUNTRY

122 Cntry8Bt

123 CntryPop

124 CntrySwg

125 CntryBld

126 Cntry2/4

127 CowboyBg

128 CntryShf

129 Blgrass

LATIN

130 BrzSamba

131 Bossa

132 PopBossa

133 Forro

134 Srtanejo

135 Tijuana

136 Joropo

137 Parranda

138 Regaeton

139 DscLatin

140 Mambo

141 Salsa

142 Beguine

143 GtrRumba

144 Flamenco

145 RmbIslnd

146 Reggae

BALLROOM

147 VienWltz

148 EngWaltz

149 Slowfox

150 Foxtrot

151 Quickstp

152 Tango

153 Pasodobl

154 Samba

155 ChaCha

156 Rumba

157 Jive

TRAD & WORLD

158 US March

159 6/8March

160 GerMarch

161 PolkaPop

162 OberPlka

163 Trntella

164 Showtune

165 Xmas Swg

166 XmasWltz

167 Reel

168 Hawaiian

169 Durngens

170 CGrupera

171 Saeidy

172 WehdaSag

173 Laff

174 IranElec

175 Emarati

176 Luo Gu

177 Jing Ju

178 Dangdut

179 Kroncong

Style No. Style Name

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Tabla/Tanpura Pattern List

Pattern No. Pattern Name

1 TeenTaal

2 Rupak

3 JhapTaal

4 EkTaal

5 ChauTaal

6 Chachar

7 Dadra

8 Keherwa

9 Garba

10 Bhajan

11 Punjabi

12 Tishram

13 Chtushrm

14 Khandam

15 Mishram

16 Sankernm

WALTZ

180 ItalyWlz

181 MriacWlz

182 Serenade

183 SwingWlz

184 Jz Wlz 1

185 Jz Wlz 2

186 CntryWlz

187 OberWltz

188 Musette

CHILDREN

189 Learn2/4

190 Learn4/4

191 Learn6/8

192 Fun 3/4

193 Fun 4/4

PIANIST

194 Stride

195 PnoBls 1

196 PnoBls 2

197 Pno Rag

198 Pno R&R

199 PnoBoogi

200 PnoJzWlz

201 PnoJzBld

202 Arpeggio

203 Musical

204 SlowRock

205 8Pno Bld

206 PnoSwing

Style No. Style Name

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Song List

Song

No.

Song Name Composer

Main Demo

1 India Original

2 GlobePop Original

3 Chillin Original

Voice Demo

4 Grand Piano Demo Original

5 Sweet! Tenor Sax Demo Original

6 Cool! Rotor Organ Demo Original

7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo Original

8 Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo Original

9 Power Kit Drum Demo Original

10 Dance Kit Drum Demo Original

11 Afro Cuban Kit Percussion Demo Original

Piano Solo

12 Maple Leaf Rag S. Joplin

13 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair S. C. Foster

14 The Last Rose of Summer Traditional

15 For Elise L. v. Beethoven

16 Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F. Chopin

17 Turkish March W.A. Mozart

18 Menuett/Beethoven L. v. Beethoven

19 Andante grazioso (Sonate K.331) W. A. Mozart

20 24 Preludes op.28-7 F. Chopin

21 Melodie (Album für die Jugend) R. Schumann

Fröhlicher Landmann (Album für die

Jugend)

R. Schumann

Von fremden Ländern und Menschen

(Kinderszenen)

R. Schumann

24 Träumerei (Kinderszenen) R. Schumann

25 Thema (Impromptus D.935-3) F. Schubert

26 Menuett BWV. Anh.116 J. S. Bach

27 Invention Nr.1 J. S. Bach

28 Gavotte/J. S. Bach J. S. Bach

29 Arietta/Grieg E. Grieg

30 To a Wild Rose E. A. MacDowell

31 Tango/Albeniz I. Albéniz

32 La Fille aux Cheveux de Lin C. A. Debussy

33 La Chevaleresque J. F. Burgmüller

34 Arabesque J. F. Burgmüller

35 Pastorale J. F. Burgmüller

36 Annie Laurie Traditional

37 The Entertainer S. Joplin

Piano Ensemble

38 Amazing Grace Traditional

39 Die Lorelei F. Silcher

40 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. W. A. Mozart

41 Scarborough Fair Traditional

42 Old Folks at Home S. C. Foster

43 Londonderry Air Traditional

44 Home Sweet Home H. R. Bishop

45 Jesus bleibet meine Freude J. S. Bach

46 Loch Lomond Traditional

47 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star Traditional

48 Three Blind Mice Traditional

Believe Me If All Those Endearing

Young Charms

Traditional

50 Nocturne op.9-2 F. Chopin

51 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” F. Chopin

52 Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod

J. S. Bach /

C. F. Gounod

53 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J. S. Bach

54 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär Traditional

55 Der Vogelfänger bin ich ja W. A. Mozart

56 Romanze (Serenade K.525) W. A. Mozart

57 Ave Verum Corpus W. A. Mozart

58 Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt

59 Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet

60 Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn

61 Ode to Joy L. v. Beethoven

62 O Christmas Tree Traditional

63 Deck the Halls Traditional

64 Silent Night F. Gruber

Piano Accompaniment

65 Ep Ballad Original

66 Boogie Woogie Original

67 Rock Piano Original

68 Salsa Original

69 Country Piano Original

70 Gospel R&B Original

71 Medium Swing Original

72 Jazz Waltz Original

73 Medium Bossa Original

74 Slow Rock Original

Classical Melodies

75 Waltz (The Sleeping Beauty) P. I. Tchaikovsky

76 Air (Orchestral Suite) J. S. Bach

77 Minuetto/Boccherini L. Boccherini

78 Siciliano/J. S. Bach J. S. Bach

79 Menuet (L'Arlésienne) G. Bizet

80 Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvořák

81 Largo (From the New World) A. Dvořák

82 Pizzicato Polka J. Strauss II

83 Romanze/Beethoven L. v. Beethoven

84 Swan Lake P. I. Tchaikovsky

85 Sicilienne/Fauré G. Fauré

86 Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet

87 Serenade/Haydn F. J. Haydn

88 Grand March (Aida) G. Verdi

89 Danza dell'Ore (La Gioconda) A. Ponchielli

90 Le Cygne (Le Carnaval des Animaux) C. Saint-Saëns

91 L'éléphant (Le Carnaval des Animaux) C. Saint-Saëns

92 Fossiles (Le Carnaval des Animaux) C. Saint-Saëns

Wachet auf, ruft uns die Stimme BWV.

645

J. S. Bach

Traditional Melodies

94 Greensleeves Traditional

95 Beautiful Dreamer S. C. Foster

96 Ring de Banjo S. C. Foster

97 O du lieber Augustin Traditional

98 London Bridge Traditional

99 Aura Lee Traditional

100 Aloha Oe Q. Liliuokalani

Raga Scale

101 Bilawal –

102 Khamaaj –

103 Bhairav –

104 Kalyan –

105 Asavari –

106 Kalyani –

107 Hamsadhvani –

108 Mohanam –

109 Hindolam –

110 Sankarabharanam –

Song

No.

Song Name Composer

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Arpeggio List

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

1UpOct

2DownOct

3 UpDwnOct

4SynArp1

5SynArp2

6SynArp3

7SynArp4

8 SyncEcho

9 PulsLine

10 StepLine

11 Random

12 Down&Up

13 SuperArp

14 AcidLine

15 TekEcho

16 VelGruv

17 Planet

18 Trance1

19 Trance2

20 Trance3

21 ChordAlt

22 SynChrd1

23 SynChrd2

24 Syncopa

25 Hybrid1

26 Hybrid2

27 Hybrid3

28 Hybrid4

29 Hybrid5

30 PfArp1

31 PfArp2

32 PfArp3

33 PfArp4

34 PfClub1

35 PfClub2

36 PfBallad

37 PfChd8th

38 EPArp

39 PfShufle

40 PfRock

41 Clavi1

42 Clavi2

43 RocknPf

44 70RockPf

45 SlowflPf

46 SoulPf

47 ChordUp

48 ChdDance

49 LatinRck

50 Salsa1

51 Salsa2

52 Reggae1

53 Reggae2

54 Reggae3

55 6/8R&B

56 Gospel

57 BalladEP

58 Strum1

59 Strum2

60 Strum3

61 Strum4

62 Pickin1

63 Pickin2

64 Funky

65 GtrChrd1

66 GtrChrd2

67 GtrChrd3

68 GtrArp

69 FngrPck1

70 FngrPck2

71 CleanGtr

72 Slowfl

73 Samba1

74 Sa mba 2

75 Spanish1

76 Spanish2

77 Harp1

78 Harp2

79 FngrBas1

80 FngrBas2

81 FngrBas3

82 CoolFunk

83 SlapBass

84 AcidBas1

85 AcidBas2

86 FunkyBas

87 CmbJazB1

88 CmbJazB2

89 CmbJazB3

90 NewR&BBs

91 HipHopBs

92 SmoothBs

93 DreamBas

94 TranceBs

95 LatinBas

96 Strings1

97 Strings2

98 Strings3

99 Strings4

100 StrngDwn

101 StrngUp

102 OrcheStr

103 Jupiter

104 Pizz1

105 Pizz2

106 BrasSec1

107 BrasSec2

108 BrasSec3

109 FunkBras

110 S ou lRe ed

111 D is co Ld

112 S moo t hP d

113 PercA rp

114 Tri ll

115 Cresendo

116 DiscoCP

117 Perc1

118 Perc2

119 R &B

120 Funk1

121 Funk2

122 Funk3

123 Soul

124 ClscHip

125 Smooth

126 NewGospl

127 CmbJazz1

128 CmbJazz2

129 Bebop

130 JazzHop

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

131 FolkRock

132 Unplugge

133 HipHop

134 Trance

135 Dream

136 2 Step

137 ClubHs1

138 ClubHs2

139 EuroTek

140 House

141 Ibiza1

142 Ibiza2

143 Ibiza3

144 Garage

145 Samba

146 African

147 Latin

148 China

149 Indian

150 Arabic

151 TeenTalC

152 TeenTalD

153 TeenTalE

154 TeenTalF

155 TeenTalG

156 TeenTalA

157 Dadra C

158 Dadra D

159 Dadra E

160 Dadra F

161 Dadra G

162 Dadra A

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Music Database List

MDB No. MDB Name

ALL TIME HITS

1 Jude Hey

2New UK

3 MyLoving

4 All OK

5Buttercp

6JustCall

7 CheepChp

8 Daddy's

9Dance?

10 GetBack

11 GtrWheel

12 HighTide

13 IWasBorn

14 Sailing

15 BluJeans

16 Holiday

17 Imagine

18 LoveMe

19 LetItBld

20 LdyMdona

21 YelowSub

22 Marriage

23 MovinOut

24 My Shell

25 NowNever

26 DoLoveMe

27 TcktRide

28 SeeClear

29 Masachus

30 Hard Day

31 USA Pie

32 Norway

33 YesterBd

MODERN POP

34 Watches

35 SoundMPH

36 Hold Us

37 Unfound

38 NeedSome

39 PrtTmLvr

40 MoonShdw

41 NikitSng

42 Sure of

43 Off Day

44 Tell Her

45 GirlsMne

46 NeedLove

47 Radio

POP CLASSICS

48 Standing

49 RainLaff

50 Sunshine

51 ForNamdo

52 ThankFor

53 ManPiano

54 CoinLane

55 LovesYou

56 Tmbourin

57 Alone

58 GldField

59 Raindrop

60 SultanSw

61 Life'sWk

62 TopWorld

63 WatchGrl

POP BALLAD

64 WnderLnd

65 CanIStop

66 EvryTime

67 IvoryAnd

68 TheWorld

69 LovWoman

70 Dolannes

71 Madigan

72 Paradise

73 Whisper

BALLAD

74 AllOdds

75 AtonalFl

76 Hero

77 Woman

78 RunToYou

79 LoveOfAl

80 CndleWnd

81 Cavatina

82 Cherish

83 ToLoveMe

84 YouKnow

85 Evrythng

86 EyesOfBl

87 Hello

88 BeThere

89 FlyAway

90 LoveYou

91 NeverLet

92 JustOnce

93 IfYouGo

94 SavingAl

95 InTheDrk

96 LovePwr

97 Vision

98 Beautifl

99 AllAlone

100 Opposite

101 BeHonest

102 SayYou

103 SayNthng

104 Stranger

105 OneDay

106 TheBayou

107 ThisSong

108 Distance

109 ThisWay

110 LoveGone

111 Inspirng

112 TrueColr

ROCK & ROLL

113 ShakenUp

114 Beethovn

115 HurryLov

116 BeCruel

117 Jumping

118 Countdwn

119 SuePeggy

120 Champion

121 Jailhous

122 BlueShoe

123 Rockin24

124 Shouting

MDB No. MDB Name

125 Rock&Rll

126 HonkyTnk

OLDIES

127 Daydream

128 Sumertme

129 Diana's

130 Uptown

131 Apache

132 IGotIt

133 Tonight

134 MyPillow

135 NoRain

136 FinalDan

137 SlpnLion

138 Ghetto

139 LipsLcky

140 PrettyWm

141 TikiGtr

142 TurnThre

143 Sherry

DANCE & DISCO

144 Babylon

145 Goodbye

146 Catch22

147 DISCO

148 Survival

149 TheNavy

150 DontHide

151 Celebrat

152 LondonRU

153 10,2 Sun

154 ShakeYou

155 Believe

156 BoySumer

157 I'mSexy

158 StuffHot

SWING & JAZZ

159 MoonOf

160 Patrol

161 Charles

162 GiveLove

163 HallOfMe

164 Rhythm

165 LOVE

166 LeroyBad

167 Caraban

168 Misbehav

169 Safari

170 Smiling

171 SoWhatIs

172 TimeGone

173 TasteHny

174 Sandman

175 Tunisian

176 TwoFoot

177 MyBaby

R&B

178 Sally's

179 AsPlayed

180 BabyGrov

181 Highwy66

182 SweetCHI

183 JustU&Me

184 ManLoves

185 OurLove

MDB No. MDB Name

Music Database List

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

186 Wish I

187 What

COUNTRY

188 OnTheRd

189 Breathe

190 InMyMind

191 ContryHw

192 GreenGrs

193 EverNeed

194 Lonesome

195 Lucille

196 HomeRng

197 Tennesse

LATIN

198 Bananabt

199 DanceMng

200 DntWorry

201 Jamaica

202 FleaSpa

203 I'mPola

204 MamboJm

205 OneNote

206 PasoCani

207 SayNoMor

208 Beguine

209 Tijuana

210 Picture

ENTERTAINMENT

211 OnTheHil

212 Barnacle

213 Califrag

214 DadClock

215 DanceLd

216 DnceFire

217 BigCntry

218 Cabaret

219 OdeToJoy

220 Mi-Re-Do

221 MyPrince

222 Necesary

223 NoBuiz

224 NoisyOld

225 Sleigh

226 RockBaby

227 Magnifiq

228 Magnfcnt

229 SilentNt

230 Nabucco

231 Standing

232 SummerPl

233 Christms

234 Favorite

235 Tubbie

236 Turkish

237 12OClock

WALTZ & TRAD

238 Blk&Whte

239 CanCan

240 Charmain

241 Musicbox

242 Clementn

243 Doodah!

244 Dreamer

245 EnterRag

246 Birthday

MDB No. MDB Name

247 MaryLamb

248 Donald's

249 MoonWlz

250 MoulinHt

251 Sunshine

252 PieceOf

253 GreenSlv

254 TakeFour

255 TexRose

256 ThePolka

257 Scarboro

258 Edelweis

259 AroundWd

260 Whatever

261 Yankee's

WORLD

262 Hawaii

263 D'amor

264 ElCondor

265 GoodbyRm

266 ILandOn

267 ItalyBel

268 Cucarumb

269 Puntuali

270 Cielito

271 ItalySun

272 SantaLuc

273 Trumpetr

274 VanMass

PIANIST

275 ItalySun

276 BeGood

277 Birdland

278 BlueRose

279 Chaie's

280 Highwy66

281 Leaves

282 Miload

283 Cabaret

284 Wonderfl

285 Imagine

286 LtleStar

287 MapleRag

288 Mi-Re-Do

289 NoBuiz

290 OhBlah

291 Charades

292 Sally's

293 Nabucco

294 SunnyStr

295 MistyFln

296 LdnBridg

297 GrndClck

298 Importnc

299 Snowman

300 Favorite

301 SongForU

302 SugerSpn

303 ThisWay

304 WenSmile

305 ZipperD

MDB No. MDB Name

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Effect Type List

Harmony Types

Reverb Types

Chorus Types

No. Harmony Type Description

01 Duet

Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note

melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompani-

ment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain

chord data.

02 Trio

03 Block

04 Country

05 Octave

06 Trill 1/4 note

Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in

time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompani-

ment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo set-

ting. The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to

the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-

note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets.

• The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes

are held.

• The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four).

• The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played.

07 Trill 1/6 note

08 Trill 1/8 note

09 Trill 1/12 note

10 Trill 1/16 note

11 Trill 1/24 note

12 Trill 1/32 note

13 Tremolo 1/4 note

14 Tremolo 1/6 note

15 Tremolo 1/8 note

16 Tremolo 1/12 note

17 Tremolo 1/16 note

18 Tremolo 1/24 note

19 Tremolo 1/32 note

20 Echo 1/4 note

21 Echo 1/6 note

22 Echo 1/8 note

23 Echo 1/12 note

24 Echo 1/16 note

25 Echo 1/24 note

26 Echo 1/32 note

No. Reverb Type Description

01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.

04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.

06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.

08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.

10 Off No effect.

No. Chorus Type Description

01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

05 Off No effect.

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Specifications

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify

products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please

check with your Yamaha dealer.

Size/Weight

Dimensions (W x D x H) 946 mm x 405 mm x 140 mm (37-1/4” x 15-15/16” x 5-1/2”)

Weight 6.8 kg (15lbs 0oz.) (not including batteries)

Keyboard

Number of Keys 61

Touch Response Yes

Other Controllers

Pitch Bend Yes

Control Knobs Yes

Display

Display LCD display

Language English

Voices

Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology AWM Stereo Sampling

Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) 32

Preset Number of Voices 214 + 466XGlite + 6 Indian Kits + 21 Drum/SFX Kits + 46 Arpeggio

Compatibility GM, XGlite

Effects

Types

Reverb 9 types

Chorus 4 types

Master EQ 5 types

Harmony 26 types

Ultra-Wide Stereo 3 types

Functions

Dual Yes

Split Yes

Arpeggio type 162 types

Accompaniment

Styles

Preset

Number of Preset Styles 206

Fingering Multi finger

Style Control

ACMP ON/OFF, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL, SYNC START,

SYNC STOP, START/STOP, TRACK ON/OFF

User Styles 5

Other Features

Music Database 305

One Touch Setting (OTS) Yes

Tabla/Tanpura

pattern

Preset

Number of Preset Tabla

Patterns

Number of Variations 5 (for each Tabla Pattern)

Number of Preset Tanpura

Patterns

4 (for all Tabla Patterns)

Recording/Playback

Preset Number of Preset Songs 110

Recording

Number of Songs 10

Number of Tracks 6 (5 Melody + 1 Style)

Data Capacity

Approx. 19,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded)

Approx. 5,500 chords (when only “chord” tracks are recorded)

Compatible Data

Format

Playback SMF

Recording Original File Format (SMF conversion function)

Function

Lesson/Guide

[1 LISTENING, 2 TIMING, 3 WAITING], [Repeat & Learn], [Chord Dictionary]

Registration Number of Buttons 4 (x 8 banks) with Freeze function

Overall

Metronome Yes

Tempo Range 11 – 280

Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12

Tuning 427.0 – 440.0 – 453.0 Hz

Miscellaneous Portable Grand Button Yes

Memory/Connectivity

Memory

Internal Memory Approx. 1.54MB

External Strage Device USB flash memory

Connectivity

DC IN DC IN 12V

Headphones/Output [PHONES/OUTPUT] x 1

Sustain Pedal [SUSTAIN] x 1

USB TO DEVICE Yes

USB TO HOST Yes

Amplifiers/Speakers

Amplifiers 2.5W + 2.5W

Speakers 12cm×2 + 3cm×2

Power Supply

Adaptor

• Adaptor:

PA-150A or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

Batteries

Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargable bat-

teries

Power Consumption • 16W (PA-150A)

Auto Power Off Function Yes

Accessories

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual

• AC Power Adaptor

PA-150A or an equivalent

•Music Rest

• Online Member Product Registration

Optional Accessories

• AC Power Adaptor

PA-150A or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

• Keyboard Stand (L-2C)

• Stereo Headphones (HPE-150/HPE-30)

• Footswitch (FC4/FC5)

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Index

AC Power Adaptor .................. 9, 12

Accessories .................................... 9

ACMP ..................................... 22, 40

Arpeggio ................................. 20, 39

Arpeggio List ............................... 77

Arpeggio Quantize ................ 39, 49

Arpeggio Type ....................... 20, 49

Arpeggio Velocity ........................ 49

ATTAC K ...................................... 37

Attack Time ..................... 37, 48, 49

Auto Accompaniment ................. 40

Auto Accompaniment range .......22

AUTO FILL ................................. 40

Auto Power Off ............................ 14

Auto Power Off Time .................. 50

Backup .......................................... 32

Backup Clear ............................... 32

Backup Parameters ...................... 32

Battery .......................................... 12

Battery Type ........................... 12, 50

Beat ............................................... 15

BGM Playback ............................ 46

Can’t Use ...................................... 59

Chord ...................................... 15, 43

Chord Dictionary ......................... 45

CHORUS ...................................... 37

Chorus Depth ................... 33, 48, 49

Chorus Type ........................... 33, 49

Complet. ....................................... 59

Computer-related Operations .......9

CUTOFF ...................................... 37

Data Err ........................................ 59

Del SMF ....................................... 58

Del USR ....................................... 58

Demo Cancel ......................... 32, 50

Demo Group .......................... 32, 50

Demo Play Mode ......................... 50

Demo Song ................................... 24

Disk Ful ........................................ 59

Display ......................................... 15

Drum Kit List ............................... 67

Dual Voice ........................ 16, 36, 49

EFFECT ..................................37, 38

Effect Type List ............................80

EG .................................................38

EG (Envelope Generator) ............37

ENDING .......................................40

Envelope Generator .....................37

EQ Setting ....................................35

EQ Type ........................................35

Error ..............................................59

Excellent .......................................27

Exit? ..............................................59

External Clock ..............................50

Fast Forward .................................25

Fast Reverse ..................................25

File Control ..................................59

File Ful ..........................................59

FILTER ...................................37, 38

Filter ..............................................21

Filter Cutoff ............................21, 49

Filter Resonance ....................21, 49

Flash Clear ....................................32

Footswitch ..............................13, 39

Format ...........................................53

Freeze Mode .....................31, 32, 50

Function ........................................48

Function List ................................48

GM System Level 1 .......................8

Grade .......................................27, 50

Harmony .......................................19

Harmony Type ........................19, 49

Harmony Volume .........................49

Headphone ....................................13

Initial Send ...................................50

Initialization .................................32

INTRO ..........................................40

Keyboard Out ...............................50

Knob ........................................21, 37

Knob assignment ..........................15

Lesson .......................................... 26

Lesson Track ................................ 50

Listen ............................................ 26

Load STY ..................................... 57

Load USR .................................... 56

Local Control ............................... 49

MAIN ........................................... 40

Main ............................................. 16

Main Voice ................................... 16

Master EQ Type ..................... 32, 49

MASTER VOLUME .................. 14

MEASURE .................................. 15

Melody Voice ............................... 47

Metronome ............................. 18, 50

Metronome Volume ..................... 18

MIDI Basics ................................... 9

MIDI Reference ............................. 9

Music Database ........................... 22

Music Rest ..................................... 9

no data .......................................... 59

no file ............................................ 59

Notation ........................................ 15

Octave ..................................... 48, 49

OK ................................................ 27

One Touch Setting ....................... 34

Pan .......................................... 48, 49

Pause ............................................. 25

PC mode ....................................... 49

Pedal Function ............................. 50

PITCH BEND .............................. 34

Pitch Bend Range .................. 34, 48

Pitch Controls .............................. 34

Power ............................................ 14

Power Requirements ................... 12

Power source ................................ 13

Preset Song .................................. 47

Protect .......................................... 59

Index

PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

RAGA SCALE ............................ 24

Random ........................................ 46

Recording ..................................... 28

Registration Memory .................. 31

RELEASE .................................... 38

Release Time .......................... 38, 49

Repeat ........................................... 25

Repeat & Learn ............................ 27

RESONANCE ............................. 37

REVERB ...................................... 37

Reverb Depth ................... 33, 48, 49

Reverb Type ........................... 33, 49

Save SMF ..................................... 55

Save USR ..................................... 54

Section .......................................... 40

SMF (Standard MIDI File) .........55

Song .............................................. 24

Song Book ...................................... 9

Song Category ............................. 24

Song List ...................................... 76

Song Out ...................................... 50

Song Volume .................... 32, 47, 48

Sostenuto ................................ 13, 50

Split Point ............................... 43, 48

Split Voice ........................ 17, 36, 49

Style ........................................ 22, 40

STYLE FILE ................................. 8

Style File ...................................... 57

STYLE FILTER .......................... 38

Style List ...................................... 74

Style Out ...................................... 50

Style Volume .......................... 42, 48

Sustain .......................................... 39

SYNC START .............................. 22

Synchro Start ............................... 40

Synchro Stop ................................ 41

Tabla ....................................... 23, 37

Tabla/Tanpura Pattern List .......... 75

Tanpura ................................... 23, 37

Tap Start ....................................... 42

Tempo ..................................... 18, 42

Time Signature ....................... 18, 50

Timing .......................................... 26

Touch Sensitivity ................... 35, 48

Track ............................................. 28

TRACK CONTROL .................... 41

Track On/Off ................................25

Transpose ................................34, 48

Troubleshooting ...........................60

Tuning .....................................34, 48

UnFormat ......................................59

USB .................................................8

USB Flash Memory .....................51

USB TO DEVICE ........................51

USB TO HOST ............................11

UseAdpt ........................................59

User Song .....................................28

Variation .................................23, 42

Very Good .....................................27

Vo i c e L i st ......................................61

Volume ....................................48, 49

Volume of the Pattern ..................42

Volume of the Style .....................42

Waiting ..........................................26

Wide Type .....................................49

XGlite .............................................8

Your Tempo ..................................50

ZC95840

U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division

205POTY*.*-01A0

Printed in China

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 044-387-8080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Ofce)

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Poland Ofce

ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: 022-500-2925

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Soa, Bulgaria

Tel: 02-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida

MSD06

Tel: 02133-2144

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany lial

Scandinavia

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – lial

Denmark

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacic Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector

47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue,

P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED

Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: 6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th oor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacic Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacic Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI4

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

Appendix Reference Quick Guide DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual EN Setting Up 2 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 3 Table of Contents Setting Up Special Features ..............................................................5 Compatible Format and Functions ...................................8 About the Manuals ...........................................................9 Included Accessories .......................................................9 Setting Up Panel Controls and Terminals 10 Setting Up 12 Power Requirements......................................................12 Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment...13 Connecting a Footswitch to the SUSTAIN jack ..............13 Basic Operations 14 Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................14 Auto Power Off Function ................................................14 Selecting Operations ......................................................14 Display Items 15 Quick Guide 16 Selecting a Main Voice...................................................16 Playing the “Grand Piano” ..............................................16 Layering a Dual Voice ....................................................16 Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ....................17 Using the Metronome .....................................................18 Adding Harmony ............................................................19 Creating Arpeggios 20 Triggering the Arpeggio..................................................20 Changing the Arpeggio Type .........................................20 Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs 21 Selecting a Knob Effect Combination.............................21 Applying the Filter to the Main Voice..............................21 Reference Playing Styles 22 Using the Music Database .............................................22 Playing the Tabla/Tanpura! 23 Playing Songs 24 Listening to a Demo Song ..............................................24 Selecting and Playing Back a Song ...............................24 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ..............25 A-B Repeat.....................................................................25 Turning Each Track On/Off ............................................25 Using the Song Lesson Feature 26 Three Types of Song Lesson .........................................26 Practicing with Song Lesson ..........................................26 Making Practice Perfect—Repeat & Learn.....................27 Appendix Recording Your Performance 28 Track Structure of a Song ..............................................28 Quick Recording.............................................................28 Recording to a Specified Track ......................................29 Clearing a User Song .....................................................30 Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song ................30 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 31 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory ..31 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory..31 Backup Parameters and Initialization 32 Backup Parameters........................................................32 Initialization ....................................................................32 4 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features 33 Selecting a Reverb Type................................................33 Selecting a Chorus Type................................................33 Pitch Controls—Transpose ............................................34 Pitch Controls—Tuning ..................................................34 Pitch Controls—the PITCH BEND wheel .......................34 Calling up Optimum Panel Settings ...............................34 Changing the Touch Sensitivity of the Keyboard ...........35 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ..................35 Voice Settings 36 Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................36 Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................36 Voice Editing ..................................................................36 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs 37 Arpeggio Settings 39 Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Tabla Playback—Arpeggio Quantize ...................................39 Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch ........39 Quick Guide Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Reference Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns 40 Style Variations—Sections.............................................40 Synchro Stop .................................................................41 Tabla/Tanpura Variations...............................................42 Changing the Tempo .....................................................42 Tap Start ........................................................................42 Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Tabla/Tanpura......42 Setting the Split Point.....................................................43 Playing Chords Without Style Playback .........................43 Chord Types for Style Playback.....................................44 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............45 Song Settings 46 BGM (Background Music) Playback ..............................46 Random Song Playback ................................................46 Tempo Setting of the Song ............................................47 Tap Start ........................................................................47 Song Volume .................................................................47 Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song ......................47 The Functions 48 Basic Procedure in the Function Display .......................48 USB Flash Memory Operations 51 Connecting a USB Flash Memory..................................52 Formatting a USB Flash Memory...................................53 Saving User Data to a USB Flash Memory....................54 Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Memory...55 Loading User Data from a USB Flash Memory..............56 Loading a Style File .......................................................57 Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Memory..............58 Deleting a SMF File in the USB Flash Memory..............58 Exiting from a File Control display..................................59 Appendix Troubleshooting ............................................................. 60 Voice List ....................................................................... 61 Drum Kit List .................................................................. 67 Style List ........................................................................ 74 Tabla/Tanpura Pattern List ............................................ 75 Song List ........................................................................ 76 Arpeggio List .................................................................. 77 Music Database List....................................................... 78 Effect Type List .............................................................. 80 Specifications................................................................. 81 Index .............................................................................. 82 Setting Up Special Features Creating New Sounds Page 21 By adjusting just two knobs you can add varying degrees of distortion, “sweetness,” or other characteristics to a sound to change it subtly or drastically. Parameters that can be assigned to the knobs include effect, filter, envelope generator and more. You can create new sounds in real time! Arpeggio Function Page 20 Similar to the arpeggio functions provided on some synthesizers, this function automatically produces arpeggios (broken chords) when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. A variety of arpeggios can be produced by changing your fingering or the arpeggio type. Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 16 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. Play Along with Styles Page 22 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering a wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance ... and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. EuTrance 067 Try playing the Tabla/Tanpura feature! Page 23 This special feature lets you play Indian phrase patterns via the Tabla and Tanpura sounds, as if you were using the Tabla machine and Tanpura machine. Let’s enjoy the conventional Indian music via the panel buttons and Knobs. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 5 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Setting Up WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Battery • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage. - Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. - Do not dispose of batteries in fire. - Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged. • Use the specified adaptor (page 81) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. - Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. - Use the specified battery type (page 12) only. - Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by the same manufacturer. Do not open - Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. - When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. - When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them. Water warning • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. Fire warning - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. DMI-5 6 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 1/2 CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Connections • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. Setting Up Power supply/AC power adaptor Handling caution Location • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.  Saving data • Some data items (page 32) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a USB flash memory (page 51). Information  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. DMI-5 2/2 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 7 Compatible Format and Functions Setting Up GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. 8 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual About the Manuals Setting Up This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.  Included Documents Owner’s Manual (this book) • Setting Up Please read this section first. • Quick Guide This section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while playing the instrument. • Reference This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions of the instrument. • Appendix This section includes troubleshooting information and specifications. Data List Contains various important preset content lists such as those of Voices, Styles, Tabla/Tanpura patterns and Effects.  Online Materials (from Yamaha Manual Library) MIDI Reference Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about MIDI. Computer-related Operations Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transferring song data. To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Manual Library, enter “PSR-I455” or “MIDI Basics” to the Model Name box, then click [SEARCH]. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/  Online Materials (for Yamaha Online members) Song Book (only in English) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • AC Power Adaptor • Music Rest • Online Member Product Registration* Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up Display (page 15) Front Panel Setting Up Harmnum1 001 t y u i q !2 e !0 o !1 !3 r @3 w Front Panel q w e r t y u i o !0 10 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................Page 14 PITCH BEND wheel..............................Page 34 [ ] (Standby/On) switch ....................Page 14 LIVE CONTROL section [ASSIGN] button ...............................Page 21 [A] and [B] knobs .............................Page 21 [DEMO] button......................................Page 24 [LESSON] button..................................Page 26 [REC] button .........................................Page 28 [METRONOME] button.........................Page 18 TEMPO section [TAP] button ......................................Page 42 [-] and [+] buttons .............................Page 42 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ...............Page 16 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual !1 VOICE CONTROL section [SPLIT] button................................... Page 17 [DUAL] button ................................... Page 16 [HARMONY] button .......................... Page 19 [ARPEGGIO] button..........................Page 20 !2 Playback Control buttons • When the [TABLA/TANPURA] lamp is turned on:............................ Pages 23 and 42 • When the [SONG] lamp is turned on: ..............................................Page 25 • When the [STYLE] lamp is turned on: ......................... Pages 22, 40, and 41 001 Panel Controls and Terminals Tabla/Tanpura Pattern List (page 75) Style List (page 74) Voice List (page 61) Setting Up Dial (page 14) !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 @0 !9 @2 @1 Song List (page 76) “Press & Hold” symbol By holding down one of the buttons having this symbol, you can call up an alternate function, other than the one called up when simply pressing. Rear Panel @4 @5 @6 !3 [TRACK CONTROL] buttons • When the [TABLA/TANPURA] lamp is turned on:..........................................Page 23 • When the [SONG] lamp is turned on: ..............................................Page 25 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 • When the [STYLE] lamp is turned on: ..............................................Page 41 [TABLA/TANPURA] button ..................Page 23 [SONG] button ......................................Page 24 [STYLE] button .....................................Page 22 [VOICE] button .....................................Page 16 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................Page 22 [CATEGORY] buttons...........................Page 14 [REGIST MEMORY] buttons ................Page 31 [FUNCTION] button ..............................Page 48 @7 @2 Number buttons [1]–[9], [-/NO], [0/EXECUTE] and [+/YES] buttons ..... Page 14 @3 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit.... Page 16 Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.” Rear Panel @4 USB terminals USB TO HOST terminal*...................Page 49 USB TO DEVICE terminal ................Page 51 @5 SUSTAIN jack ....................................... Page 13 @6 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................ Page 13 @7 Power supply jack................................ Page 12 * For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computerrelated Operations” (page 9). When connecting, use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up  Installing the batteries Power Requirements Setting Up Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (display is blank, except for notation staff). 2 Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. Using an AC Power Adaptor 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (display is blank, except for notation staff). WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 81) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. 3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. 2 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack. 3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. 4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Connecting or disconnecting the power adaptor with batteries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data being recorded or transferred at the time. 2 AC power adaptor 3 AC outlet When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already-recharged ones. NOTE • This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. Using Batteries This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickel-metal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batteries). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable NiMH batteries are recommended for this instrument, since other types may result in poorer battery performance. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument.  Setting the battery type After installing the new batteries then turning the power on, make sure to set the Battery Type to Rechargeable type or not. For details, refer to page 50. NOTICE WARNING • When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. 12 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual • Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly. Setting Up  Power source on the display You can confirm the power source at the left corner of the display. Only one of these is shown. Harmnum1 When is shown, the power is supplied from the AC power adaptor. When is shown, the power is supplied from the batteries. When the AC power adaptor is connected with the batteries installed, the power is supplied from the AC power adaptor and the indication is shown.  Remaining battery power indication You can confirm the approximate amount of remaining battery power at the top left of the display. PUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. Setting Up  Checking the power status on the display CAUTION • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn off the power for all components. NOTICE • When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Connecting a Footswitch to the SUSTAIN jack Indicates that the power will be turned off immediately. When rechargeable batteries are used, this icon flashes before the power is turned off. Indicates that remaining power is insufficient for operation. Before the power runs out, replace all the batteries with new ones, or fully recharged ones (when using rechargeable types). Note that the instrument may not work properly, including unusually soft volume and poor sound quality when remaining power becomes low. Indicates that the remaining power is sufficient. Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment You can produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing an optional footswitch plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack. Although the footswitch works as the Sustain pedal for most Voices, it features other functions such as Sostenuto and Arpeggio Hold (for Voices 242–287). One of these functions can be assigned to the footswitch on the Function display (page 50). NOTE • When Split is on, the sustain function does not affect the current Split Voice (page 17) while sostenuto and Arpeggio Hold (page 39) affect only the current Split Voice. • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 13 Basic Operations Turning the Power On/Off Setting Up Turn down the MASTER VOLUME control to “MIN” then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the MASTER VOLUME control. To turn off the power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a second. • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. Selecting Operations CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Auto Power Off Function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes.  To disable the Auto Power Off function: Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power while holding down the lowest key.  To set the time that elapses before Auto Power Off is executed: Press the [FUNCTION] button, press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button several times until “Auto Power Off” appears then select the desired value. Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 Default value: 30 NOTE • Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the power is turned off. For details, see page 32. NOTICE • Depending on the instrument status, the power may not turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified period of time. Always turn off the power manually when the instrument is not in use. 14 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are used to select items and change values.  Dial Decrease Increase Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value, or counterclockwise to decrease the value.  Number buttons Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. Example: Selecting Voice 003, Harmnum3. Press number buttons [0], [0], [3].  [-] and [+] buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase.  CATEGORY buttons Use these buttons to jump to the first Voice, Style, or Song in the next or previous Category, and call up the next or previous Function sequentially. Display Items Power source status Indicates the source from which this instrument obtains power, AC power adaptor or batteries. (Page 13) USB connection status Appears when USB flash memory is connected to this instrument. (Page 51) Setting Up The display shows all the current settings of the Song, Style, Tabla/Tanpura, Voice and other related functions. Notation Normally this indicates the notes you play. When the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates the current notes and chord of playback. When the Dictionary function is used, this indicates the notes of the chord you specify. NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va.” • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown, due to space limitations in the display. Harmnum1 001 On/off status This area indicates the on/off status of each function. Each indication is shown when the corresponding function is turned on. Page 17 001 Beat Indicates the current beat of playback. (Page 24) Knob assignment Indicates the parameters currently assigned to the Knobs. (Page 21) Page 16 Page 19 Page 20 Page 35 Page 22 Page 41 FUNCTION and MEASURE Indicates the Function number, the current Measure number of a Song/Style, or the current Beat number of the Tabla/Tanpura pattern. 001 Chord Indicates the chord which is being played on the keyboard (Page 22) or specified via Song playback. Track status Indicates the on/off status of the current Song, Style or Tabla/Tanpura. (Pages 23, 28, 41) PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 15 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Quick Guide In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical sounds. Selecting a Main Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name will be shown. Playing the “Grand Piano” When you want to reset various settings to default and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Voice name Harmnum1 Quick Guide 001 Voice number Appears after the [VOICE] button is pressed. 2 Use the dial to select the desired Voice. Shehnai 004 Select 004 Shehnai 3 The Voice number is set to 020 Grand Piano and all the settings such as Dual and Split are turned off automatically, with exception of the Touch Sensitivity (page 35). Play the keyboard. Layering a Dual Voice In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on. Shehnai 004 Appears when dual voice is on Preset Voice Types 16 001–019 (Indian Voices) Used for Indian music performance. 020–220 Instrument Voices. 221–241 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys. Details on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the Drum Kit List (page 67). 242–287 Used for Arpeggio performance (page 20). PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Two voices will sound at the same time. 2 Press the [DUAL] button again to exit from Dual. Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a different Dual Voice (page 36). Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas, you can play a different Voice between the Left hand and Right hand areas. 1 Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split. The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and Right hand areas. Shehnai Quick Guide 004 Appears when split voice is on Split Point Split voice Main voice and dual voice You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the keyboard. The highest key for the Left hand area is referred to as the “Split Point” which can be changed from the default F#2 key. For details, refer to page 36. 2 Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit from Split. You can easily select a different Split Voice (page 36). However, you need not select a Split Voice for one of the Main Voices 272–281. This is because these Voices already are set up to enable Split automatically and call up an appropriate Split Voice. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 17 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Using the Metronome 2 The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for practicing. 1 NOTE Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. • This parameter cannot be set during playback of a Style, Song or Tabla/Tanpura. 3 2 Rotate the dial to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. If “0” is selected, all beats will simply click with no chime. Select 5 for this example. Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. Press the CATEGORY [+] button to call up “TimeSigD” (Time Signature Denominator). The length of one beat is shown on the display. Quick Guide TimeSigD 04 Adjusting the Metronome Tempo Press the TEMPO [TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the Tempo value. 4 Rotate the dial to select the length of one beat, from 2nd, 4th, 8th and 16th note. Select “08” (8th note) for this example. 5 Confirm the setting by playing the Metronome. Tempo 090 Current Tempo value The dial and the Number buttons can also be used to set the Tempo. The length of one beat. Setting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] buttons repeatedly until “MtrVol” appears. Setting the Time Signature Here, we’ll set a time signature of 5/8 as an example. 1 Hold down the [METRONOME] button for longer than a second to call up “TimeSigN” (Time Signature Numerator). The number of beats per measure is shown on the display. TimeSigN Hold for longer than a second. 18 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 04 Number of beats per measure. MtrVol 100 052 Metronome volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the Metronome Volume. Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Adding Harmony You can add harmony notes to the Main Voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony on. Rotate the dial to select the desired Harmony Type. For details, refer to the Effect Type List (page 80). The effect and operation differs depending on the Harmony Type. Refer to the section below. How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 01 to 05 Although turning on the Harmony will select a Harmony Type suitable for the current Main Voice, you can select a different Harmony Type. 2 Hold down the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second until “HarmType” appears on the display. After “HarmType” is shown for a few seconds, the current Harmony Type appears. HarmType Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 22). Quick Guide Appears when the Harmony is turned on. • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Hold down two keys. • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) 038 Keep holding down the keys. Hold for longer than a second. • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) Trio 02 038 Current Harmony Type You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 49). NOTE • The Harmony function cannot be used in the Tabla/Tanpura mode. Even if Harmony is turned on, pressing the [TABLA/ TANPURA] button will turn off the Harmony effect. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 19 Creating Arpeggios The Arpeggio function lets you create arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing the notes of the chord. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—to trigger interesting phrases. This feature can be used for music production as well as performance. Triggering the Arpeggio 1 Press the [ARPEGGIO] button to turn on the Arpeggio function. Shehnai Changing the Arpeggio Type The most suitable Arpeggio Type is automatically selected when you select a Main Voice, but you can easily select any other Arpeggio Type. 1 004 Quick Guide Hold down the ARPEGGIO [TYPE] button for longer than a second. In the display, “ARP Type” appears for a few seconds, followed by the current Arpeggio Type appears. NOTE • Selecting a Voice number between 242 and 287 will turn on Arpeggio automatically. 2 Press a note or notes to trigger Arpeggio. The Arpeggio phrase differs depending on the number of pressed notes and the area of the keyboard. DownOct Hold for longer than a second. 2 002 The currently selected arpeggio type Rotate the dial to select the desired Arpeggio type For a list of the Arpeggio List, see page 77. NOTE When Split is on, Arpeggio is applied only to the Split Voice. When Split is off, Arpeggio is applied to the Main and Dual Voices. Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/Dual Voices simultaneously. NOTE • When you select one of the Main Voices 272–281, Split as well as Arpeggio is automatically turned on. This allows you to immediately trigger an Arpeggio by pressing a key to the left of the Split Point after selecting one of these Voices. • When the Pedal Function is set to “Arp Hold” or “Hold+Sus” (page 50), pressing the footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack will cause Arpeggio playback continue even after the note is released. 3 20 To turn off the Arpeggio, press the [ARPEGGIO] button again. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual • When any of Voices 242–287 are selected, it is a good idea to set the Pedal Function to “Arp Hold” or “Hold+Sus” (page 50). This setting allows you to use a footswitch (press and hold) to have Arpeggio playback continue even after the note is released. Creating Original Sounds via the Knobs The two knobs located in the lower left area of the panel can be used to add variations to the sound being played, transforming the sound in a variety of musical ways. Select the desired pre-programmed effect combination printed above the Knobs, then rotate the Knobs to enjoy the sound. Repeatedly press the [ASSIGN] button to sequentially select the six effect combinations provided: (1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  (6)  (1) … etc. The current combination is shown in the display. Applying the Filter to the Main Voice 1 Select the desired Main Voice. Here, select “178 SquareLd” (Square-wave Lead) as a synth-lead type Voice. 2 Press the [ASSIGN] button several times until (3) (Filter) appears in the display). 3 Rotate Knob B all the way to the right (maximum), then play the keyboard with your right hand while operating Knob A with your left. Harmnum1 001 Filter Cutoff Quick Guide Selecting a Knob Effect Combination Filter Resonance 001 Current value (1)–(2) affect the entire the Tabla/Tanpura sound, (3)– (5) affect the Main and Dual Voices only, and (6) affects only playback of the Style and Tabla/Tanpura. For details about each Knob effect, refer to page 37. Only selecting a Knob effect combination will not affect the sound even if the Knob arrow is not at the initial position. After operating the Knob, the selected effect is applied to the sound. NOTICE • Selecting a different Voice will replace the settings created via the Knobs with the default settings of the new Voice. If you create a sound with the Knobs that you wish to keep, make sure to memorize the settings to Registration Memory (page 31) before selecting a different Voice. NOTE • Rotating a Knob to the right while the volume is set to a high level may result in distortion. If this occurs, reduce the volume level. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 21 Playing Styles This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres. 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then use the dial to select the desired Style. The Style List is shown on the front panel; also see page 74. For information about chords, refer to “Chord List” (page 44) or use the Chord Dictionary function (page 45). Style Name Split Point Bhajan 001 Style Number Quick Guide This icon appears when a style number and name is displayed. 2 5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. EuTrance You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details, refer to page 40. 067 This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point (54: F#2) becomes the “Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the chords. Split Point (F#2) If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music Database, just selecting the favorite music genre calls up the ideal settings. 1 Auto Accompaniment range 3 Using the Music Database Music Database name Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. Jude Hey 001 EuTrance 067 2 Use the dial to select the desired Music Database. This operation calls up the panel settings such as Voice and Style that are registered to the selected Music Database. For a list of the Music Database List, see page 78. 3 Play the keyboard as described in Steps 4–5 above. Flashes when sync start is on. 4 22 Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range to start playback. Play a melody with the right hand and chords with the left hand. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start are automatically turned on. Playing the Tabla/Tanpura! This instrument provides 16 phrase patterns (consisting of several measures) using the authentic Tabla and Tanpura sounds with looped playback. By using the Tabla/Tanpura function, try out the conventional Indian music—changing keys and creating dynamic sound variations by rotating the Knobs. 1 Press the [TABLA/TANPURA] button, then use the dial to select the desired Tabla/Tanpura pattern. Refer to the Tabla/Tanpura list on the panel of this instrument. tions, which are shared among all Tabla/Tanpura patterns. To turn off the Tanpura sound, press the Tanpura button of the current number.  Changing the Variation via the [A]–[E] buttons TeenTaal 2 Quick Guide 001  Using the Knobs Press the [START/STOP] button to start looped playback. At first, only the Tabla sound will play back. During playback, enjoy creating sound variations via the following operations.  Turning on/off Tabla tracks 1 and 2 individually Adjusting the Volume Balance Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to select “1 TABLA/TANPURA,” then rotate Knob A to adjust the volume balance between the sounds of Tabla 1 (low-pitched part) and Tabla 2 (high-pitched part), or rotate Knob B to adjust the volume balance between the sounds of the Tabla and Tanpura. Indicates the on/off status of the Tabla tracks. Adjusting the Tempo / Transposing playback Press the [ASSIGN] button several times to select “2 TABLA/TANPURA,” then rotate Knob A to adjust the playback tempo, or rotate Knob B to transpose the playback key in semitones. Tabla 1 features the lower pitched part while Tabla 2 features the higher pitched part.  Adding the Tanpura phrase and changing it from 1–4 NOTE • You can confirm the current key and tempo value on the display. To call up the current tempo value, press the TEMPO [-] or [+] button. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. Indicates the current Tanpura number. At first, press any of the [TANPURA 1]–[TANPURA 4] buttons to add the Tanpura phrase. Next, press another Tanpura button to change the phrase. You can enjoy four phrase varia- NOTE • The Tabla/Tanpura performance cannot be recorded. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Songs You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of the functions, such as Lesson.  Song Category The Songs are organized by category as listed below. • • • • • • • • • • Gives you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. Demonstrates many useful Voices of this instrument. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for the Song Lesson. These piano ensemble pieces are also well suited for the Song Lesson. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these songs are ideal for that purpose. Includes famous classical music pieces. Includes traditional Songs from around the world. Practice Songs for studying the traditional scale of India. Songs you record yourself. Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related operations”—page 9) and Songs in the USB flash memory (page 53). Quick Guide Listening to a Demo Song Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs in sequence. Playback will repeat continuously, starting again from the first Song (001). Selecting and Playing Back a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the desired Song. Refer to the Song List (page 76). To stop playback, press the [DEMO/BGM] button. ForElise 015 Current Song 2 Press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [ ] (Start/Stop) button again. ForElise 015 Each arrow mark flashes in time with the beat. 24 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Playing Songs Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause Like the transport controls on an audio player, this instrument lets you fast forward [ ] (Fast Forward), rewind [ ] (Fast Reverse) and pause [ ] (PAUSE) playback of the Song. Fast Forward During playback, press this button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE Quick Guide • If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button before starting playback. Turning Each Track On/Off Fast Reverse During playback, press this button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. Pause During playback, press this button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. Each “track” of a Song plays a different part—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. Each of the tracks can be muted so that you can play the muted part yourself. Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly will toggle the on/off status. NOTE • When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast Forward will only work within the range between A and B. A-B Repeat Track number on—Track will playback You can play back only a specific section of a Song repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point) in one-measure increments. A Track number off—Track is muted or contains no data B NOTE • Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning on or off. 1 Start playback of the Song (page 24). 2 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the start point, press the [ ] (A-B REPEAT) button to set the A point. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 25 Using the Song Lesson Feature You can use the selected Song for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Try practicing with these three Song Lesson types while referring to the music scores in the Song Book (page 9). Three Types of Song Lesson Practicing with Song Lesson 1 Lesson 1—Listen Select the desired Song for your lesson (page 24). NOTE In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well. LISTEN • The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs (SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page 24), but cannot be applied to the User Songs. 2 Quick Guide Lesson 2—Timing In this mode, simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes shown in the display will sound Turn off the part you want to practice. For the right-hand lesson, press the [1/RIGHT] button to turn off the right-hand part. For the lefthand lesson, press the [2/LEFT] button to turn off the left-hand part. For the lesson using both hands, turn off both the parts. TIMING Pressing the [1/RIGHT] and [2/LEFT] buttons repeatedly will toggle the on/off status of each part, which can be shown on the display. Lesson 3—Waiting In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing at. ForElise 015 WAITING NOTE • If you want to keep a steady playback tempo is maintained during Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter (page 50) to OFF. Right-hand lesson Track 1 is unlit Left-hand lesson Track 2 is unlit Both-hands lesson Track 1 and 2 are unlit NOTE • Song numbers 075–100 only support the right-hand lesson. 3 Press the [LESSON] button to start playback of the Song Lesson. After starting playback, pressing the [LESSON] button repeatedly will change the Lesson number from 1: LISTEN  2: TIMING  3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this button until the desired number is shown on the display. TIMING Lp2 007 The notation and key positions you should play are shown. 26 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Using the Song Lesson Feature To stop Lesson playback, press the [START/ STOP] button. Even during playback, you can change the Lesson number by pressing the [LESSON] button. If you want to practice a specific section in which you made a mistake or you have difficulty with use the Repeat & Learn function. Press the [ ] (REPEAT & LEARN) button during a Lesson playback. See How You’ve Done Excellent Very Good Good OK ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~~~ ~~ When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. The Song location will move back four measures, a one-measure count will play, then Song playback will start again. Playback of the four measures will repeat with a one-measure count-in. To exit from this status, press this button again. Quick Guide 4 When Lesson playback reaches to the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. “2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your performance in four levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. Making Practice Perfect— Repeat & Learn NOTE • You can change the amount of measures the Repeat & Learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 27 Recording Your Performance You can record up to 10 of your performances as User Songs. The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument. NOTE • The Tabla/Tanpura performance cannot be recorded. 4 Track Structure of a Song Start recording. • When you press the [SONG] button in Step 2, play any note to start recording.  Melody Tracks [1]–[5] The melody performance in the right-hand area of the keyboard will be recorded.  Accompaniment Track [A] The chord progression (for the Style) will be recorded. • When you select a Style in Step 2, play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment area to start recording with Style playback, or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording only with playback of the Rhythm part of a Style. User 1 Quick Guide rEC 003 Current measure number Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Accompaniment Track The current measure will be shown on the display while recording. 5 Quick Recording The operation is useful when you record a new Song from scratch. 1 2 Make the desired settings including the Main Voice selection. or Make the desired settings of your performance. After recording finishes, “Writing!” appears indicating that the recorded data will be stored, then the recorded track numbers in the display will light. • If you want to record only the melody performance, press the [SONG] button. • If you want to record the performance using a Style, press the [Style] button. 3 Press the [REC] button to enter the Record Ready mode. If a User Song was not selected beforehand, this operation selects the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (from 101–110) as Recording target. User 1 rEC Flashes 001 Flashes To exit from this status, press the [REC] button again. NOTE • The ACMP on/off status cannot be changed after the [REC] button is pressed. 28 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Press the [START/STOP] or [REC] button to stop recording. When using a Style, you can stop recording also by pressing the [ENDING] button then waiting until playback ends. NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when “Writing!” is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. 6 To play back the recorded Song, press the [START/STOP] button. Recording Your Performance The operation here is useful especially when you want to record the additional performances to an already recorded Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button, then select the desired User Song (111–120) as the recording target. User 1 111 Song number 2 3 Same as in Steps 4 to 6 (page 28) in “Quick Recording.” NOTE • If the memory becomes full while recording, an alert message will appear and recording will stop automatically. In this case, delete unnecessary data by using the Clear functions (page 30), then execute the recording again. Limitations while recording • The on/off status of ACMP cannot be changed. • The Style number cannot be changed. • When you use a Style, the following parameters cannot be changed: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Time Signature, Style number and Style Volume. • Performance with a Split Voice cannot be recorded. Quick Guide Recording to a Specified Track While holding down the [REC] button, press the desired Track button to enter the Record Ready mode.  If you want to record only the melody: While holding down the [REC] button, press one of the [1]–[5] buttons. Press and hold User 1 rEC 001 Track 1 will flash  If you want to record only the Style playback: Press the [STYLE] button, select the desired Style, then simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [6/A] button. ACMP is automatically turned on. Press and hold User 1 rEC 001 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 29 Recording Your Performance Clearing a User Song Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song You can clear all tracks of a User Song. 1 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select the User Song (111–120) to be cleared. While holding down the track [A] button, press the track [1] button for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. Quick Guide Hold for longer than a second. This lets you clear individual tracks from a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button, then select the desired User Song (111–120). 2 From [1]–[5] and [A], press the Track button to be cleared for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. Press and hold Hold for longer than a second. ClrUser1 ClrTr1 YES YES 3 Press the [+] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. To cancel this operation, press the [-] button. 3 Press the [+] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display.To cancel this operation, press the [-] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the Song. A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the track. A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display. 30 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 32 complete setups can be saved (eight banks of four setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Up to 32 presets (eight banks of four each) can be memorized. 1 Make the desired settings such as those for Voice, Style, and Tabla/Tanpura. 2 Press and release the [MEMORY/BANK] button to call up a Bank number on the display. Bank Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 2 3 Press and release the [MEMORY/BANK] button to call up a Bank number on the display. Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a Bank number. Press one of the [1]–[4] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display for a few seconds. Quick Guide Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory 1 Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select a Bank number. REGIST 1 1 NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the Registration Memory during Song playback. 4 While holding down the [MEMORY/ BANK] button, press one of the [1]–[4] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. Press and hold Writing! IMPORTANT • When recalling the panel settings from the Registration Memory, make sure to press the same button—[STYLE] or [TABLA/ TANPURA]—corresponding to the mode used when you memorize the panel settings. This is necessary since the mode status (Style or Tabla/Tanpura) is not memorized to the Registration Memory, meaning that it cannot be called up even if you press the REGISTRATION MEMORY button. Freezing the Style settings even if a different Registration number is selected If you want to select different Registration Memory setups without changing the Style settings or Tabla/ Tanpura settings, simultaneously hold down the [VOICE] button and press the REGIST MEMORY number button. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Press and hold If you want to freeze the Style settings or Tabla/Tanpura settings permanently, set the Freeze mode parameter to ON from Function display 060 (page 50). NOTE • For details about the parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory, see the next page. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 31 Backup Parameters and Initialization Backup Parameters The following data will be maintained even if the power is turned off and can be transferred then saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single Backup file. For instructions, refer to “Computerrelated Operations” (page 9). Initialization This function erases the Backup data described above and Song/Style data, then restores all the default factory settings. As required, execute one of the following two procedures. Backup Clear • User Song data (page 28) • Style data transferred from a computer and loaded to Style numbers 207–211 (page 57) • Registration Memory data (page 31) This operation initializes the backup data. While holding down the highest white key on the keyboard, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Quick Guide • Function Settings (page 48): Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Tabla/Tanpura Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Group, Demo Play, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Your Tempo on/off, Auto Power Off setting, Battery Select, Freeze Mode In addition to the Backup data above, all the Style data (including data that have not been loaded) and all the Song data will be maintained even if you turn off the power. Parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory  Style settings* Style number, ACMP on/off, Style volume, Track on/off  Tabla/Tanpura settings** Tabla number, Tabla/Tanpura volume, Section, Track on/off, Volume balance between Tabla 1 and 2, Volume balance between Tabla and Tanpura Flash Clear This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer. Note that Style data loaded to Style numbers 207–211 will be maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.  Voice settings Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the related Functions Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the related Functions Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the related Functions  Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type  Arpeggio settings Arpeggio on/off and all settings of the related Functions  Harmony settings Harmony on/off and all settings of the related Functions  Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Knob Effect Combination number, Split Point, Tempo, Pedal Function * Available only when a Style is selected. ** Available only when a Tabla is selected. 32 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual NOTICE • Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 9). Handy Performance Features Reference Selecting a Reverb Type Selecting a Chorus Type The Reverb effect lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum Reverb type for the entire sound, you can select a different Reverb type manually. The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same Voices being played in unison. Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum Chorus type for the entire sound, you can select a different Chorus type manually. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Reverb” (Function 034). After “Reverb” is shown for a few seconds, the current Reverb Type is shown. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Chorus” (Function 035). After “Chorus” is shown for a few seconds, the current Chorus Type is shown. Reverb Chorus 034 035 Hall2 1 Current Reverb type Current Chorus type NOTE NOTE • Some Songs and Styles use Reverb Types which cannot be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. 3 Rotate the dial to select a Reverb type. Play the keyboard to check the sound. For information about the available Reverb types, refer to the Effect Type List (page 80). Adjusting the Reverb depth You can adjust the Reverb depth applied to the Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the same operations above. Regarding the item in Step 2, refer to the Function List on page 48. 035 Reference 02 Chorus1 034 • Some Songs and Styles use Chorus Types which cannot be selected via panel operation. If such a Song or Style is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. 3 Rotate the dial to select a Chorus type. Play the keyboard to check the sound. For information about the available Chorus types, refer to the Effect Type List (page 80). Adjusting the Chorus depth You can adjust the Chorus depth applied to the Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the same operations above. Regarding the item in Step 2, refer to the Function List on page 48. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 33 Handy Performance Features Pitch Controls—Transpose The overall pitch of the instrument (except for the Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Transpos” (Function 004). Pitch Controls—the PITCH BEND wheel The PITCH BEND wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. Transpos 00 3 004 Use the dial to set the Transpose value between -12 and +12. Calling up Optimum Panel Settings Pitch Controls—Tuning Reference The overall tuning of the instrument (except for the Drum Kit Voices) can be shifted up or down between 427 Hz and 453 Hz in approximately 0.2Hz increments. The default value is 440.0 Hz. Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Tuning.” Tuning 005 Use the dial to set the Tuning value. 440.0Hz 005 34 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual You can call up optimum panel settings that are ideal and stylistically appropriate for the current Song or Style—with a single touch. If you don’t know what settings are best with a selected Voice, for example, use the following functions.  To call up the settings for a Song or Style (One Touch Setting): Select Voice number “000 OTS.” In this status, selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum panel settings matching the current Song or Style. 1 3 You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel. Refer to “Pitch Bend Range” in the Function List (page 48). Handy Performance Features Changing the Touch Sensitivity of the Keyboard Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically and expressively control the level of the Voices according to your playing strength. Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button several times until “TouchSns” (Function 008) appears. “TouchSns” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the current Touch Sensitivity is shown. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [+] or [-] button several times until “MasterEQ” (Function 036) appears. “MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the current Master EQ type appears. TouchSns MasterEQ 008 036 Medium Speaker 008 1 Current Touch Sensitivity 3 Use the dial to select a Touch Sensitivity setting between 1 and 4. When “1”–“3” is selected, higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e. greater sensitivity. When “4” (off) is selected, all notes will be played at the same volume no matter how strongly or softly you play the keys. NOTE • The initial default Touch Sensitivity value is “2”. 036 Reference 2 Current EQ type 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ type. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. NOTE • “Boost” produces a more punchy sound but may produce distortion depending on the Voice and Style, compared to the other Master EQ types. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 35 Voice Settings Selecting a Dual Voice Voice Editing 1 For each of the Main, Dual and Split Voices, you can edit the parameters such as volume, octave and depth of the Reverb and Chorus, allowing you to create new, custom sounds that best suit your musical needs. Hold down the [DUAL] button for longer than a second to call up “D.Voice.” “D.VOICE” is shown for a few seconds, then the current Dual Voice appears. D.Voice 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up the desired item. Main Voice parameters are indicated as “M.******,” Dual Voice parameters as “D.******,” and Split Voice parameters as “S.******.” For information about each parameter, refer to the Function List on page 48. 018 Syn.Str 093 018 Current Dual Voice 2 Rotate the dial to select the desired Dual Voice. M.Volume 064 Selecting a Split Voice 1 Reference Hold down the [SPLIT] button for longer than a second to call up “S.Voice.” “S.VOICE” is shown for a few seconds, then the current Split Voice appears. 3 Rotate the dial to set the value. Check the sound by playing the keyboard. 4 Repeat Steps 2–3 above to edit various parameters. 5 If necessary, memorize the settings to the Registration Memory (page 31). The Voice-related settings are reset when a different Voice is selected. If you want to store the created sound for future recall, memorize the settings to the Registration Memory. S.Voice 028 Strings 086 028 Current Split Voice 2 36 Rotate the dial to select the desired Split Voice. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 009 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs This section describes each of the parameters which can be assigned to the Knobs (page 21). TABLA/TANPURA Knob A adjusts the volume balance between the sounds of Tabla 1 and 2, while Knob B adjusts the volume balance between the sounds of Tabla and Tanpura. x Level TABLA/TANPURA Knob A adjusts the tempo of Tabla playback while the Tanpura playback tempo is maintained. This follows typical Indian music stylistic conventions. Knob B raises or lowers the pitch of the Tabla/Tanpura sound in semitones, with the exception of Tabla 1. This accurately simulates the characteristics of the Tabla, in which the lower sound is not affected by the tuning. Note that also the pitch of Tabla 2 may not be changed depending on the Tabla/Tanpura pattern. NOTE • When Knob B is turned all the way left, only the pitch of the Tabla 2 sound is raised abruptly by an octave. This is due to a limitation in this instrument. c  Knob B: RESONANCE Adjusts the amount of Resonance applied at the filter’s cutoff frequency. Turning the Knob to the right will increases the Resonance to emphasize the frequencies at the cutoff frequency, and thus “strengthens” the perceived effect of the filter. FILTER Filter effects shape the sound by allowing only a specified range of frequencies to pass and/or by producing a resonance peak at the filter’s “cutoff” frequency. Filter effects can be used to create a range of synthesizerlike sounds. NOTE • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. • Filter effects can sometimes cause distortion in the bass frequencies.  Knob A: CUTOFF Adjusts the filter’s cutoff frequency, and therefore the brightness of the sound. Turning the Knob to the left makes the sound more muffled or darker, while turning the Knob A to the right makes the sound brighter. Resonance Frequency v EFFECT  Knob A: REVERB Reproduces the acoustic ambience of a concert hall or club. Turning the Knob to the right will increase the Reverb depth.  Knob B: CHORUS Produces a layered “multi-instrument” effect. Turning the Knob to the right will increase the Chorus depth. NOTE • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. b Reference z EG (Envelope Generator) Envelope Generator effects determine how the level of the sound varies over time. You can make the attack faster for a more percussive sound or slower for a violin-like sound, for example. Or you can lengthen or shorten the sustain to best match the music you’re playing. Level Sustain Level Level ATTACK Cutoff Frequency Key Played Frequency Frequencies in this range are passed. Frequencies in this range are cut off. DECAY RELEASE Time Key Released  Knob A: ATTACK Adjusts the Attack Time (the amount of time it takes the sound to reach maximum level when a key is played). Turning the Knob to the right will increase the Attack Time, thus slowing down the attack rate. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 37 Parameters Assigned to the Knobs  Knob B: RELEASE Adjusts the Release Time (the amount of time it takes for the sound to decay to silence after a key is released). Turning the Knob to the right will increase the Release Time, thus make a longer sustain. n STYLE FILTER Same as “ c FILTER.” These effects are applied only to Style or Tabla/Tanpura playback. NOTE • These effects are applied only to the Main/Dual Voices played on the keyboard. The chart below lists some interesting ways to use the various effects that can be assigned to the knobs. Some Ideas for Using the Knobs Number/Effect z x TABLA/TANPURA TABLA/TANPURA Try This Knob A adjusts the volume balance between the sounds of Tabla 1 (having the lower sound) and Tabla 2 (having the higher sound of Tabla or Mridangam). Knob B adjusts the volume balance between the sounds of the Tabla (assigned to the [TABLA 1] and [TABLA 2] buttons) and Tanpura (assigned to the [TANPURA 1]–[TANPURA 4] buttons). Play with these Knobs as the patterns loop, sing along if you wish, and create your own performance. Reference Knob A adjusts the tempo of Tabla/Tanpura playback. Setting to the minimum left-most position results in half the default tempo, while setting to the maximum right-most position results in double the default tempo. The center position corresponds to the default tempo. Note that the tempo cannot exceed the range (11–280), and that the tempo of the Tanpura patterns will not change even if you rotate Knob A. Knob B raises or lowers the pitch of the Tabla/Tanpura sound in semitones. Regarding the Tabla, only the higher sound (assigned to the [2] button) will be transposed. Rotating the knob leftward lowers the pitch while rotating the knob rightward raises the pitch. Use these knobs to set the desired tempo and key, sing along if you wish, and create your own performance! c v b n 38 FILTER Select a synth-type lead or pad voice (see the Voice List; page 61). Turn Knob B all the way up and operate Knob A while playing for some spacey, floating 1980’s effects. EFFECT Select a voice that sounds as though it already has reverb and chorus effects applied, and turn Knob A and Knob B all the way down to hear the “direct” sound of the voice. You can then turn the Knob A and Knob B settings up to add extra impact and richness to the voice. EG Select a piano voice, and turn Knob B all the way up and Knob A to about the 3 o’clock position. This should give you a majestic, organ-like sound. The attack time is quite long so play the keys and hold them to let the sound come in fully. Ideal for slow pieces. STYLE FILTER Select style 67, Euro Trance. Turn accompaniment on and start style playback (page 22). Set Knob B to about 3 o’clock, and Knob A to about 8 o’clock. The overall sound of the style should be a bit muffled, with the drums emphasized for solid rhythmic impact. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Arpeggio Settings Synchronizing an Arpeggio to Song/Style/Tabla Playback— Arpeggio Quantize When you play the keyboard to trigger an Arpeggio (page 20) along with Song/Style/Tabla playback, you’ll need to play the notes with correct timing to keep the Arpeggio in synchronization with the other playback tracks. However, your actual timing may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both). The “Arpeggio Quantize” function of this instrument will correct any slight imperfections in the timing (according to settings below), and then play back the Arpeggio appropriately. Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback continues even after the note has been released, by pressing the footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Pdl Func” (Function 063). After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the current setting is shown. • Synchronizing at the quarter notes • Synchronizing at the 8th notes • No synchronization with Style or Song playback Pdl Func Although the Arpeggio Quantize value is pre-programmed for each Arpeggio Type, you can change the value manually. Press the [FUNCTION] button. Sustain 1 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Quantize” (Function 042). After “Quantize” is shown for a few seconds, the current Arpeggio Quantize value is shown. Current setting 3 2 042 063 If you want to restore the footswitch function to sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus”. 1/8 042 Current value 3 Rotate the dial to select “Arp Hold.” Arp Hold Quantize 2 063 Reference 1 063 Rotate the dial to select a value from “OFF,” “1/8” and “1/16.” • 1/8 Synchronizing at the quarter notes • 1/16 Synchronizing at the 8th notes • OFF No synchronization with Style or Song playback 4 Try playing Arpeggio with the footswitch. Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then press the footswitch. Even if you release the notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 39 Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns Style Variations—Sections Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. INTRO MAIN A/B ENDING AUTO FILL INTRO This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the Intro finishes, Style playback shifts to the Main section. The length of the Intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the Song. Playback of the Main section repeats indefinitely until another Section’s button is pressed. There are two variations (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically in response on the chords you play with your left hand. AUTO FILL This is automatically added before changing to Main A or B. ENDING This is used for the ending of the Song. When the Ending finishes, the Style playback stops automatically. The length of the Ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. Reference 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then rotate the dial to select a Style. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. Beat arrows flash.  Synchro Start When the Synchro Start is on, Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. To turn off the Synchro Start, press the [SYNC START] button. Appears when ACMP is turned on. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. MAIN A Current Section 40 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. ENDING INTRO≥A Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the Intro section. 6 Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chords” on page 44. Split Point Accompaniment range 7 After the Intro finishes, play the keyboard according to the progression of the Song you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. Synchro Stop When you press the [SYNC/STOP] button to turn on this function, the Style will only play while pressing chords in the Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Releasing all the notes will stop Style playback. This makes it easy to add rhythmic breaks as you perform, simply by releasing your hand from the Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. Reference 5 FILL A≥B Turning on/off each Track via the [TRACK CONTROL] button The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys On/off status is shown in the display (page 15) NOTE • Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning Tracks on or off. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 41 Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns Tabla/Tanpura Variations Tap Start Each Tabla/Tanpura features five Variations A–E via the Tabla sound. These five variations can be alternated via the [A]–[E] buttons during playback, allowing you to add dynamic variations to the performance. You can start play back of the Tabla/Tanpura, Style or Song by simply tapping the TEMPO [TAP] button at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4 (4/4, etc.), and three times for time signatures in 3 (3/4, etc.). In addition, four phrase variations via the Tanpura sound are provided commonly for all the Tabla/Tanpura patterns. These four variations can be alternated via the TANPURA 1–4 buttons. Adjusting the Volume of the Style or Tabla/Tanpura Unlike the Styles, the Tabla/Tanpura patterns do not have the variations dedicated to the beginning or ending of the Song, such as Intro and Ending. The Tabla/Tanpura playback will continue until stopped manually. Changing the Tempo Reference A Style or Tabla/Tanpura can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 You can adjust the volume balance between Style or Tabla/Tanpura playback and keyboard performance. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “StyleVol” (Function 001) or “TablaVol” (Function 003). Press the TEMPO [TAP] button to call up the Tempo value in the display. StyleVol 100 Tempo 090 Current Tempo value 2 Rotate the dial to set a tempo from 011 to 280. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song. You can change the tempo during playback by pressing the TEMPO [TAP] button just twice at the required tempo. NOTE • The above operation applies also to Song or Arpeggio playback tempo. 42 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 3 Rotate the dial to set the volume between 000 and 127. 001 Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns Setting the Split Point The point on the keyboard that separates the left-hand range and the right-hand range of the keyboard is called the “Split Point.” When a Style is selected and ACMP is on, the notes played to the left of the Split Point are used to specify the chord for Style playback. When the Split function is on, the notes played to the left of the Split Point are used to play the Split Voice. The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key. Playing Chords Without Style Playback If you press the [STYLE] button, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on (the ACMP ON icon appears), and play the chord in the Left hand range of the keyboard (with SYNC START off), the chord sound will be heard without Style playback. This is referred to as “Stop Accompaniment.” The specified chord will be shown in the display, and affects the Harmony function (page 19). PopBossa 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “SplitPnt” (Function 007). You can call up this display also by pressing the [STYLE] then holding the [ACMP] button for longer than a second. 132 Appears when auto accompaniment is on Accompaniment range SplitPnt 007 Reference 054 Split Point 3 Rotate the dial to set the Split Point between 036 (C1) and 096 (C6). Split Point (54: F#2) Split voice Main voice NOTE • The Split Point set here is applied common to the Style and Voice. • During the Lesson playback, the Split Point cannot be changed. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 43 Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns Chord Types for Style Playback For users who are new to chords, this chart features common chords. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh Reference C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. 44 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Styles (Auto Accompaniment) and Tabla/Tanpura patterns 2-2. Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press the key labeled “M7” in the section between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT.” The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are conveniently shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Press and hold the [CHORD DICT] button for longer than a second to call up “Dict.” Dict. Notation of chord Hold for longer than a second. Chord name (root and type) Dict. This operation will divide the entire keyboard into the three ranges as illustrated below. 001 • The range to the right of “ROOT ”: Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no sound. • The range between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT ”: Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no sound. • The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE ”: Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in the above two ranges. Chord Type range To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. Root range 3 2 As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1. Press the “G” key in the section to the right of “ROOT ” so that the “G” is shown as the root note. Reference Keyboard playing range Individual notes of chord (keyboard) Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the range to the left of “CHORD TYPE .” When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. Dict. 001 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 45 Song Settings BGM (Background Music) Playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO/BGM] button will play back only a few of the internal Songs repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs are played, or all Songs transferred to the instrument from a computer are played back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. Five playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. 1 Hold down the [DEMO/BGM] button for longer than a second. “DemoGrp” is shown in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current repeat playback target. Random Song Playback The order of Song repeat playback via the [DEMO/ BGM] button can be changed between the numerical order and random order. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons several times to call up “PlayMode” (Function 058). “PlayMode” is shown for a few seconds, followed by the current playback mode, “Normal” or “Random.” PlayMode 058 Hold for longer than a second. 2 Reference 3 46 When the DemoGrp is set to “Demo,” this parameter cannot be set. Rotate the dial to select a repeat playback group from the table below. Demo Preset Songs 001–003 Preset All preset Songs User All User Songs Download All Songs transferred from a computer USB All Songs (MIDI files) in the connected USB flash memory Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 3 Rotate the dial to select “Random.” To return to the numerical order, select “Normal.” 4 Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again. Song Settings Tempo Setting of the Song This operation is same as that of the Style and Tabla/ Tanpura. Refer to page 42. Tap Start Melody Voice Setting of the Preset Song You can change the Melody Voice of the current Preset Song temporarily to any other desired Voice. 1 Press the [SONG] button, select the desired Preset Song, then start playback. 2 Press the [VOICE] button, then rotate the dial to select the desired Voice. This operation is same as that of the Style and Tabla/ Tanpura. Refer to page 42. Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Strings 086 Press the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons several times to call up “SongVol.” SongVol 100 002 3 Hold down the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. After “SONG MELODY VOICE” is shown for a few seconds, the Melody Voice of the Song will be changed to that selected in Step 2. Song volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the Song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE Reference 2 SONG MEL Hold for longer than a second. • Song volume can be adjusted while a Song is selected. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 47 The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. Take a look at the Function List (pages 48–50). When you find the desired Function you want to change, follow the instructions below. Basic Procedure in the Function Display 1 Find the desired item in the Function List on pages 48–50. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the value of the selected function. Direct numeric entry. StyleVol 100 3 001 • Decrement value by 1. • Cancel Press the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons several times until the desired item appears. Press simultane- • Increment ously to recall the value by 1. default setting. • Execute Some Function settings are maintained even if you turn off the power, and can be transferred to the computer as Backup Data (page 32). Current item Transpos 00 004 Function List Reference Function Number Function Display Range/Settings Default Value Description Volume 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 42. 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 47. 003 Tabla Volume TablaVol 000–127 100 Refer to page 42. Transpose Transpos -12–12 0 Refer to page 34. 440.0Hz Refer to page 34. Overall 004 005 Tuning Tuning 427Hz–453Hz (in approximately 0.2Hz increments) 006 Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01–12 007 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) TouchSns 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard), 4 (Off) 008 Touch Sensitivity 2 Sets the range over which you can control pitch by using the PITCH BEND wheel (page 34), in semitone increments. 54 (F#2) Refer to page 43. 2 (Medium) Refer to page 35. Main Voice (page 16) 48 009 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice. 010 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 011 Pan M.Pan 000 (left)–64 (center)– 127 (right) * Determines the stereo pan position of the Main Voice. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. 012 Reverb Depth M.Reverb 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice's signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 013 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 014 Attack Time M.Attack 000–127 64 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice reaches the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the value, the faster the attack rate. The smaller the value, the slower the attack rate. The Functions Function Number Function Display Range/Settings Default Value Description 015 Release Time M.Releas 000–127 64 Determines how fast the volume of the Main Voice falls to 0 when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain. 016 Filter Cutoff M.Cutoff 000–127 64 Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 37) of the Main Voice. 017 Filter Resonance M.Reso. 000–127 64 Determines the Filter Resonance (page 37) of the Main Voice. Dual Voice (page 16) 018 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–753 * 019 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 020 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. 021 Pan D.Pan 000 (left)–64 (center)– 127 (right) * Determines the stereo pan position of the Dual Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. 022 Reverb Depth D.Reverb 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 023 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 024 Attack Time D.Attack 000–127 64 Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice reaches the Attack level when the note is pressed. The larger the value, the faster the attack rate. The smaller the value, the slower the attack rate. 025 Release Time D.Releas 000–127 64 Determines how fast the volume of the Dual Voice falls to 0 when the note is released. The larger the value, the longer the sustain. The smaller the value, the shorter the sustain. 026 Filter Cutoff D.Cutoff 000–127 64 Determines the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 37) of the Dual Voice. 027 Filter Resonance D.Reso. 000–127 64 Determines the Filter Resonance (page 37) of the Dual Voice. Selects a Dual Voice. Split Voice (page 17) 028 Split Voice S.Voice 001–753 86 (Strings) 029 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice. 030 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 031 Pan S.Pan 000 (left)–64 (center)– 127 (right) * Determines the stereo pan position of the Split Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. 032 Reverb Depth S.Reverb 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 033 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Reference Selects a Split Voice. Effects 034 Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 ** Refer to page 33. 035 Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 ** Refer to page 33. 1 (Speaker) Refer to page 35. 4 (Wide Off) Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type. Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. 036 Master EQ Type MasterEQ Speaker, Boost, Headphone, Line Out1, Line Out2 037 Wide Type Wide 1–4 Harmony (page 19) 038 Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type. 039 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect ARP Type 001–162 * Determines the Arpeggio type. Arpeggio (page 20) 040 Arpeggio Type 041 Arpeggio Velocity ARP Velo 1(Original), 2(Thru) * When “Thru” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined by your playing strength. When “Original” is selected, the velocities of Arpeggio playback are determined by the original setting regardless of your playing strength. 042 Arpeggio Quantize Quantize 1(OFF), 2(1/8), 3(1/16) * Refer to page 39. Computer (USB TO HOST terminal)*** 043 PC mode PC mode OFF/PC1/PC2 OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer Local Control Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. MIDI*** 044 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 49 The Functions Function Number Function Display Range/Settings Default Value Description 045 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. 046 Keyboard Out KbdOut ON/OFF ON Determines whether MIDI messages generated via keyboard performance are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO HOST terminal. 047 Style Out StyleOut ON/OFF OFF Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Style playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO HOST terminal. 048 Song Out SongOut ON/OFF OFF Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Song playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO HOST terminal. 049 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO - Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer. Metronome (page 18) 050 Time Signature Numerator TimesigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. 051 Time Signature Denominator TimesigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. 052 Metronome Volume MtrVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson (page 26) 053 Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 1 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 054 Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 2 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 055 Grade Grade ON/OFF 056 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. ON This parameter is for Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON, playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained regardless of the speed at which you are playing. Demo (page 24) Reference 057 Demo Group DemoGrp 1 (Demo) / 2 (Preset) / 3 (User) / 4 (Download) / 5 (USB) 1 (Demo) Refer to page 46. 058 Demo Play Mode PlayMode 1 (Normal) 2 (Random) 1 (Normal) Refer to page 46. 059 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. ON/OFF OFF When set to on, the Style related settings are maintained even if you press another Registration Memory number button. OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (min.) 30 minutes Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. 1 (Alkaline) / 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument. 1 (Sustain) Determines the function of the footswitch connected to the SUSTAIN jack (page 13). When “1 (Sustain)” or “4 (Sostenut)” is selected, the footswitch works as a damper pedal or sostenuto pedal as on an acoustic piano. Note that sustain does not affect the Split Voice, while sostenuto affects only the Split Voice when Split is on. When “2 (Arp Hold)” is selected, pressing the footswitch maintains Arpeggio playback even if you release the notes (page 39). When “3 (Hold+Sus)” is selected, both the Arpeggio Hold and Sustain functions are assigned to the footswitch. Registration Memory (page 31) 060 Freeze Mode Freeze Auto Power Off (page 14) 061 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff Battery (page 12) 062 Battery Type Battery Pedal Function (page 20) 063 Pedal Function Pdl Func 1 (Sustain) / 2 (Arp Hold) / 3 (Hold+Sus) / 4 (Sostenut) * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Tabla/Tanpura. *** For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 9). 50 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual USB Flash Memory Operations By connecting the USB flash memory device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, you can save the data created on this instrument, such as User Song and parameter settings. The saved data can be recalled to this instrument again for the future use. IMPORTANT • It is recommended to use the Power Adaptor when executing USB flash memory operations, since battery power may not be reliable enough to last through these crucial operations. When you try executing certain functions, the “Use Adaptor” indication may appear and the selected function cannot be executed. This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.  Compatible USB devices The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, check the following web page: http://download.yamaha.com/ NOTE • Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used.  Connecting USB flash memory • When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. • When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. Using USB Flash Memory By connecting the instrument to a USB flash memory, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.  The number of USB flash memory to be used Only one USB flash memory device can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.  Formatting USB flash memory When a USB flash memory is connected, a message may appear prompting you to format the device. If so, execute the Format operation (page 53). NOTICE • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash memory you are formatting does not contain important data.  To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with the particular USB flash memory. If you are saving data to the USB flash memory, make sure to disable write-protect. Reference Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal  Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the USB flash memory from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save and Delete operations). NOTICE • Avoid frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB flash memory too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB flash memory, and do NOT turn the power off. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 51 USB Flash Memory Operations Connecting a USB Flash Memory 1 2 Connect a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it with the proper orientation. Wait until “USB” appears on the left corner of the display. The “USB” indication confirms that the connected USB flash memory has been mounted or recognized. Harmnum1 4 Rotate the dial to call up the desired File Control function, then execute it. For details, refer to the table below. Display File Control function Page Load STY Loading a Style File 57 Load USR Loading User Data from a USB Flash Memory 56 Save SMF Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Memory 55 Save USR Saving User Data to a USB Flash Memory 54 Del SMF Deleting a SMF File in a USB Flash Memory 58 Del USR Deleting a User File in a USB Flash Memory 58 Format? Formatting a USB Flash Memory 53 Exit? Exiting from a File Control display 59 Messages may appear on the display during File Control procedures to aid in smooth operation. Refer to the Message List on page 59 for details. NOTE • No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played while the file control display is showing, and only buttons related to File Control operations will be active. Reference 3 Hold down the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the File Control display. NOTE The File Control display cannot be called up in the following situations. • During playback of Style, Tabla/Tanpura, or Song Load STY Hold for longer than a second.  If “UnFormat” followed by “Format?” appears: This indicates that the connected USB flash memory has not been formatted, and cannot be mounted or recognized. Execute the Format operation by following the instructions starting with Step 2 on page 53. 52 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual • When “USB” does not appear even if you have connected a USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. USB Flash Memory Operations Formatting a USB Flash Memory The Format operation lets you prepare commercially available USB flash memory for use with this instrument is called “Format.” 1 2 Recognizable file location in the USB flash memory for Song playback (page 24) USB flash memory (Root) Song File Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. Song File Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Format?.” Can be selected/ played. Song File Format? Song File 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again or the [+/YES] button to execute the Format operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and the “USER FILES” folder will be created on the root directory in the USB flash memory. IMPORTANT • In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a computer or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a first-level/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. NOTE • If playback of an external Song (created via a different instrument or computer) produces the distorted sound, decrease the Song Volume (page 47) to reduce the distortion then adjust the Master Volume (page 14). Reference 3 Cannot be selected/played. NOTICE • The Format operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 5 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit from the File Control display. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 53 USB Flash Memory Operations Saving User Data to a USB Flash Memory 5 The following data created on this instrument comprise the “User Data.” • All 10 User Songs • Styles which have been transferred from a computer then loaded to Style numbers 207–211. NOTICE • The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. • All the Registration Memory settings The User Data can be saved as a single “User File” (.usr) to a USB flash memory. NOTE • The amount of time required for this operation may vary depending on the condition of the USB flash memory. NOTE • The extension (.usr) of the User File will not be shown on the display of this instrument. Confirm the extension on the computer display when connecting the USB flash memory to a computer. 1 Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Save USR.” Reference Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. As the target file name, “USER***” (***: number) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different file name from “USER001”–“USER100.” USER001 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Overwriting existing files If a file that already contains data is selected as the target user file, an overwrite confirmation message will appear. 54 6 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit from the File Control display. NOTE Save USR 3 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Save operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and a User file (.usr) will be saved in a “USER FILES” folder which will automatically be created on the USB flash memory. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual • If you want to recall the User file (.usr) to this instrument again, execute the Load operation (page 56). USB Flash Memory Operations Saving a User Song as SMF to a USB Flash Memory 5 A User Song can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0 and saved to a USB flash memory. SMF (Standard MIDI File) format With this format, various events via the keyboard performance such as note on/off and Voice selection will be recorded as MIDI data. The SMF Format 0 and Format 1 are available. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available Song file (MIDI file) is provided in SMF Format 0. 1 2 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Overwriting existing files If a file that already contains data is selected, an overwrite confirmation message will appear. 6 Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Save operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and a User Song will be saved as the SMF format 0 in a “USER FILES” folder which will automatically be created on the USB flash memory. NOTICE • The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Save SMF.” NOTE • The amount of time required for this operation may vary depending on the condition of the USB flash memory. 3 7 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. As the target User Song, “USER**” (**: number 1–10) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different User Song from “USER01”–“USER10” then press the [0/EXECUTE] button. Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit from the File Control display. Reference Save SMF User 1 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. As the target file name on the USB flash memory, “SONG***” (***: number 1–100) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select the different file. SONG001 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 55 USB Flash Memory Operations Loading User Data from a USB Flash Memory A User data (page 54) saved as a User file (.usr) to the USB flash memory can be loaded to this instrument. NOTICE • Loading a User file will overwrite and erase the existing data, including all 10 User Songs, Style data loaded to the Style numbers 207–211, and all the Registration Memory settings. Save important data you want to keep to a separate USB flash memory before loading a User file. 1 Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Load USR.” Load USR 3 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. “USER***” (***: number) appears on the display as the User file name in the USB flash memory. As desired, rotate the dial to select a different User file. Reference USER001 Note that the User file should be saved in the USERFILES folder on the USB flash memory. Files saved outside this folder cannot be recognized. 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Load operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The Load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 56 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 6 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit from the File Control display. 7 Check the loaded data by calling up the User Song, one of the Styles 207–211, and Registration Memory settings. USB Flash Memory Operations 4 Style data created on another instrument or a computer can be loaded to the Style numbers 207–211, and you can play them like the internal preset Styles. The following two Load operations are available.  Loading of a Style file (.sty) saved on the root directory on the USB flash memory  Loading of a Style file (.sty) transferred from a computer via the Musicsoft Downloader and stored in the internal memory of this instrument NOTE • For instructions on transferring a Style file from a computer via the Musicsoft Downloader, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 9). After data transfer, load the Style data to one of the Style numbers 207–211 to enable playback. Load To? 207 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 6 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Load operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE NOTICE • Loading a Style file will overwrite and erase the existing data of the destination number. Save important data you want to keep to a separate USB flash memory before loading. 1 Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Load STY.” Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. As the Load destination, “Load To? ***” (***: 207–211) appears on the display. If desired, rotate the dial to select a different number. • The Load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 7 Press the [STYLE] button, rotate the dial to select a Style from 207–211, then try playing it back. Reference Loading a Style File Load STY 3 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. A name of a Style file in the USB flash memory or internal memory of this instrument will appear on the display. As desired, rotate the dial to select a different Style file. DiscoFox FLA PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 57 USB Flash Memory Operations Deleting a User File in the USB Flash Memory Deleting a SMF File in the USB Flash Memory User Files (.usr) in the root directory of the USB flash memory can be deleted. You can delete a SMF file that has been saved in the USB flash memory via the Save SMF operation (page 55). IMPORTANT • The User file (.usr) to be deleted should have been saved in the root directory of the USB flash memory. Files outside this folder cannot be recognized. 1 2 Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. • The SMF file (.usr) to be deleted should have been saved in the root directory of the USB flash memory. Files outside this folder cannot be recognized. This operation can be applied only to file names with the “SONG***” (***: number) format. 1 Hold the [FILE CONTROL] button for longer than a second to call up the File Control display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Del SMF.” Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Del USR.” Del USR 3 IMPORTANT Del SMF Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. As a User file name in the USB flash memory, “USER****” (****: number) appears on the display. As desired, rotate the dial to select a different User file. 3 USER001 Reference 4 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. SONG001 4 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 5 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button to execute the Delete operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE • The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 6 NOTICE • The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash memory during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit from the File Control display. 6 58 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Press the [0/EXECUTE] button. As a SMF file name in the USB flash memory, “SONG***” (***: number) appears on the display. As desired, rotate the dial to select a different SMF file. Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to exit from the File Control display. USB Flash Memory Operations To exit from the File Control display, press the [VOICE], [STYLE], [TABLA/TANPURA], [SONG], [FUNCTION], or [GRAND PIANO] button. You can also exit from the File Control function mode as follows: 1 Use the CATEGORY [+] and [-] buttons to call up “Exit?.” Exit? 2 Press the [0/EXECUTE] button to exit from the File Control display. Message Comment Can’t Use Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Complet. Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Data Err Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Disk Ful Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes full. Error Displayed when a file error or operational error occurs. File Ful Indicates that SMF songs cannot be displayed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. no data There is no data to save in the flash memory. no file There is no file to load or delete from the media. 0ur Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Protect Displayed when trying to save or delete data on a protected media, or format a protected media. Set protect to off and try again. UnFormat Displayed when connecting an unformatted media. UseAdpt USB flash memory save, delete, and format operations cannot be performed when the instrument is being powered from battery. Use an AC adaptor. Reference Exiting from a File Control display PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 59 Troubleshooting Appendix Problem This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument The instrument is automatically turned off even if no operation is done. This is normal. This occurs due to the Auto Power Off function (page 14). The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The Style/Tabla/Song/Arpeggio stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones or completely recharged ones, or use the AC power adaptor. No sound is produced even when the keyboard is played, or a Song, Style, or Tabla/Tanpura is being played back. Appendix 60 Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. Check whether a set of headphones or an audio cable is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT, or not. When such a connection is made, no sound is output from the speaker of this instrument. Check the on/off status of the Local Control (page 49). Normally, set this parameter to ON. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. No sound is produced even when playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard, although chords played in the left hand area are recognized. Check whether or not the Dictionary function (page 45) is used. When used, this is normal. Not all of the Voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off, when playing the keyboard, Arpeggio, Style or Tabla/Tanpura or Song. You have exceeded 32 simultaneous notes, which is the maximum polyphony (the maximum amount of notes that can be played simultaneously) of this instrument. If the Main, Dual, and Split Voices are being used along with playback of Arpeggio, Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”). The sound of the Voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the Voice may be slightly different from note to note. The keyboard performance and playback of Style/Tabla/ Song produces an unexpected or inappropriate sound, and cannot be restored to the normal status. Using the Knobs can produce dramatic changes in the sound, but may also produce unexpected or undesired sounds. If you want to restore the original, normal sound before being changed by the Knobs, change the Voice, Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song, or press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the panel settings. The Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song does not start even when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. The Arpeggio does not start even when the note is pressed with the Arpeggio turned on. Check the on/off status of the External Clock (page 50). Normally, set this parameter to OFF. The volume of the Style, Tabla/Tanpura or Song is too low. Check the volume setting in the Functions (pages 42 and 47). The chords played in the left hand area cannot be recognized even when the ACMP is turned on. Check the Split Point setting (page 43). Set this to the appropriate value. Style parts other than the Rhythm part produce no sound. Check the on/off status of the ACMP (page 22). Make sure to turn ACMP on. The Styles numbered 194–206 produce no rhythm drum sound even when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. This is normal. Style numbers 194–206 have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. When one of these Styles is selected, turn ACMP on, then specify the chord in the left hand area to play Style parts other than the Rhythm part. The ACMP indicator does not appear on the display when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Check the on/off status of the [STYLE] lamp. When using a Style, press the [STYLE] button to turn on the [STYLE] lamp. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Voice List Maximum Polyphony Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *21 22 23 *24 25 26 27 *28 *29 30 31 *32 33 34 35 *36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 *49 50 51 52 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) INDIAN 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed) 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed) 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed) 0 123 112 Shehnai 0 123 111 Sarangi 1 0 124 111 Sarangi 2 0 124 112 Pungi 0 117 74 Bansuri 0 112 105 Sitar 1 0 113 105 Sitar 2 0 115 105 Sarod 0 97 16 Santur 0 114 105 Tanpura 0 116 117 Tabla 126 0 116 Tabla Kit 1 126 0 117 Tabla Kit 2 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2 126 0 112 Animal Kit PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano Octave Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord Octave Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP 80 Piano+Strings Piano Pad E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines Tiny Electric Piano 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano EP Pad 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 118 19 Cool! Organ 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ Full Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system, in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the transmitted program change numbers to select the appropriate sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program change number 1. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. Voice No. 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 *63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 *90 *91 92 93 94 *95 96 97 *98 99 100 *101 102 103 *104 105 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 113 23 Modern Harp 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar Octave Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 118 40 DX100 Bass 0 119 40 Ramp Bass 0 120 40 Dark Core Bass 0 119 39 Fat Lo Bass 0 122 40 Bleep Bass 0 121 40 Funk Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass STRINGS 0 112 49 String Ensemble 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 115 50 Marcato Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings Octave Strings Orchestra Section 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings Octave Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello Strings Session 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp Octave Harp 0 112 106 Banjo 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit Orchestra Hit & Timpani 0 96 105 Tambra PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Appendix The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). 61 Voice List Voice No. 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 **115 116 **117 118 119 120 *121 122 123 124 125 *126 *127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 *145 146 Appendix 147 148 149 *150 *151 *152 153 154 *155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 *163 164 165 166 167 168 62 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 96 106 Rabab 0 98 106 Oud 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 0 108 Koto 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 0 0 16 Dulcimer 0 97 108 Kanoon 0 96 16 Cimbalom Tremolo Cimbalom 0 40 47 Yang Chin Tremolo Yang Chin CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir Grand Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax 0 113 65 Sweet! Soprano Sax 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble Ballroom Sax Ensemble Jazz Section 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon 0 116 72 WoodWind Section 0 97 112 Hichiriki TRUMPET 0 115 57 Sweet! Trumpet 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn Octave Horns 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 116 62 Octave Brass Ballroom Brass Jazz Brass Section Orchestra Brass 0 113 56 Brass Hit 0 113 63 80s Brass Fat Synth Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 115 63 Funkey Brass 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute 0 113 76 Sweet! Pan Flute 0 112 74 Flute Flute & Clarinet 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 0 104 82 RS Saw Lead 1 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 *186 *187 *188 *189 *190 *191 *192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 **211 212 **213 214 **215 216 217 218 219 **220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 106 82 RS Saw Lead 2 0 114 84 RS Dist Lead 0 119 81 RS Dual Square 0 107 82 RS Ramp Lead 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw 0 119 85 RS Quack Lead 0 109 82 RS Dual Saw 0 105 82 RS Sync 1 0 119 88 RS Sync 2 0 112 81 Square Lead 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 112 88 Under Heim 0 112 85 Portatone 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 121 82 Funky Lead Octave Lead Wah Square Lead Resonance Lead Quack Lead 5th Wah Lead Super 5th Lead SYNTH PAD Dynamic Chime 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad 0 123 90 RS Synth Pad 0 113 92 RS Warm Pad 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance 0 124 90 RS Noise Pad 0 125 90 RS Tekno Man 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven 0 121 89 Dream Heaven 0 113 89 Symbiont 0 112 99 Star Dust 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 112 101 Brightness 0 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba Tremolo Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone Tremolo Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums Tremolo Steel Drum 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani Timpani Roll DRUM KITS 127 0 88 Power Kit 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 59 T8 Kit 127 0 60 T9 Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 Voice List 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 *255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 126 0 21 Bass Drum Kit 126 0 22 Reverse Bass Drum Kit 126 0 125 China Kit 1 127 0 127 China Kit 2 126 0 37 Arabic Kit 126 0 41 Cuban Kit ARPEGGIO Concerto Chambers Pizzicato Strings Latin Rock Brass Section 1 Brass Section 2 Funk Brass Piano Chord Piano Ballad Piano Arpeggio Hybrid Synth Sequence Guitarist Strum Pickin' Spanish Synth Chords Funky Clavi Reggae Organ Harpeggio Analog Sequence Sawtooth Percussion Arpeggio Trill Club Beat R&B Loop Club Adds Samba Indian Arabic Finger Bass Left Combo Jazz Left Paul's Bass Left Trance Bass Left Acid Bass Left Piano Ballad Left Salsa Piano Left Piano Arpeggio Left Guitar Arpeggio Left Strum Left Teen Tal C Teen Tal F Teen Tal A Dadra D Dadra E Dadra G XGlite Voice List Voice No. 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 18 1 MellowGrPno 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano Voice No. 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 40 3 LayeredCP 1 0 41 3 LayeredCP 2 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 18 5 MellowEP 1 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 40 5 HardEl.Piano 0 45 5 Velocity Crossfade El.P 1 0 64 5 60's El.Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 33 6 DX EP Hard 0 34 6 DX Legend 0 40 6 DX Phase EP 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 42 6 DX Koto EP 0 45 6 Velocity Crossfade El.P 2 0 0 7 Harpsichord 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 25 7 Harpsichord 2 0 27 8 Clavi.Wah 0 35 7 Harpsichord 3 0 64 8 Pulse Clavi. 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP 0 65 8 PierceClavi. XG CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 0 64 11 Orgel 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 45 12 Hard Vibes 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 97 15 Carillon XG ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60's Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60's Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70's Drawbar Organ 1 0 36 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 37 17 60's Drawbar Organ 3 0 38 17 Even Bar Organ 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70's Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 3 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 0 24 18 70's Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Appendix Voice No. 63 Voice List Voice No. 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 Appendix 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 64 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 0 0 20 Church Organ 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion 0 32 22 AccordIt 0 0 23 Harmonica 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 0 16 25 Nylon Guitar 2 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 16 26 Steel Guitar 2 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 18 27 Mellow Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 1 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 43 29 Funk Guitar 2 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm Velocity Crossfade Upright 0 45 33 Bass 0 0 34 Finger Bass 0 18 34 Finger Dark 0 27 34 Flange Bass Bass & Distorted Electric 0 40 34 Guitar 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 96 36 Syn.Fretless 0 97 36 SmthFretless 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 27 37 ResonantSlap 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 18 39 Synth Bass 1 Dark 0 20 39 Fast Reso Bass 0 24 39 Acid Bass 0 35 39 Clavi Bass 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 64 39 Orbiter 0 65 39 Square Bass 0 66 39 Rubber Bass 0 96 39 Hammer 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 32 40 Smooth Synth Bass 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass 0 64 40 XWire Bass XG STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 0 0 48 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 24 49 Arco Strings 0 35 49 60's Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 64 50 70's Strings 0 65 50 Strings 3 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 0 27 51 ResoStrings 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4 0 65 51 Synth Strings 5 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 16 53 Choir Aahs 2 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 Voice List 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 64 56 Impact XG BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 16 57 Trumpet 2 0 17 57 BriteTrumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 16 59 Tuba 2 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 40 62 Brass Section 2 0 41 62 High Brass 0 42 62 Mellow Brass 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 12 63 Quack Brass 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 24 63 Poly Brass 0 27 63 Synth Brass 3 0 32 63 Jump Brass 0 45 63 Ana Vel Brass 1 0 64 63 Analog Brass 1 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 40 64 Synth Brass 4 0 41 64 Choir Brass 0 45 64 Ana Vel Brass 2 0 64 64 Analog Brass 2 XG REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 43 66 Hyper Alto Sax 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 41 67 Soft Tenor Sax 0 64 67 Tenor Sax 2 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet XG PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth Voice No. 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 24 82 Heavy Synth 0 25 82 Waspy Synth 0 40 82 Pulse Saw 0 41 82 Dr.Lead 0 45 82 Velocity Lead 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 64 84 Rubby 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 65 85 Wire Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead 0 24 86 Synth Aahs 0 64 86 Vox Lead 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 16 90 Thick Pad 0 17 90 Soft Pad 0 18 90 Sine Pad 0 64 90 Horn Pad 0 65 90 Rotary Strings 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 64 91 Poly Pad 80 0 65 91 Click Pad 0 66 91 Analog Pad 0 67 91 Square Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 64 92 Heaven 0 66 92 Itopia 0 67 92 CC Pad 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 64 93 Glacier 0 65 93 Glass Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 64 94 Tine Pad 0 65 94 Pan Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad 0 20 96 Shwimmer 0 27 96 Converge 0 64 96 PolarPad 0 66 96 Celestial XG SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 45 97 Clavi Pad 0 64 97 Harmo Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 64 98 Ancestral 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Appendix Voice No. 65 Voice List Voice No. 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 Appendix 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 66 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 64 99 Synth Mallet 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 66 99 Loud Glocken 0 67 99 Christmas Bel 0 68 99 Vibe Bells 0 69 99 Digital Bells 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 67 100 Planet 0 0 101 Brightness 0 64 101 Fantasy Bells 0 96 101 Smokey 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 66 102 Ring Pad 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir 0 0 103 Echoes 0 8 103 Echoes 2 0 14 103 Echo Pan 0 64 103 Echo Bells 0 65 103 Big Pan 0 66 103 Synth Piano 0 67 103 Creation 0 68 103 Star Dust 0 69 103 Reso&Panning 0 0 104 Sci-Fi 0 64 104 Starz XG WORLD 0 0 105 Sitar 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 112 Shanai 0 64 112 Shanai 2 0 96 112 Pungi 0 0 106 Banjo 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 111 Fiddle XG PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 101 113 Asian Bells 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework NOTE • Selecting a Voice number between 242 and 287 will turn on Arpeggio. • Selecting a Voice number with an asterisk (*) will turn on Dual. • Selecting a Voice number with an asterisk (**) will turn on Harmony. • These Voice numbers cannot be selected via MIDI messages from a computer. Drum Kit List •“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note is actually one or two octave(s) lower than keyboard Note (see Default Octave column). For example, in “222: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note C1) corresponds to (Note C0: Note# 24). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) • Actual keyboard notes of 14 “Tabla” are one octave lower than the ones described in the list below. For example, the C4 sound in the following list is actually played from C3. C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 14 0/116/117 Tabla Baya ke / ge (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) Baya ka / ghe (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) Tabla ne / na (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) Tabla ne / tin (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) Tabla ne / di (Velocity 1-47 / 48-127) 15 126/0/116 16 126/0/117 17 126/0/40 Tabla Kit 1 Alternate Group Tabla Kit 2 Alternate Group A Tabla na A Tabla tin A Tabla Center tin A Tabla ti 01 A Tabla ti 02 A Tabla ri A Tabla kat A Tabla tu Open Baya Mid Baya Press Baya Bend Baya Slow Bend Baya Fast Click Open Click G Low Tabla Tharang G# Low Tabla Tharang A Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang C Low Tabla Tarang C# Low Tabla Tarang D Low Tabla Tarang D# Low Tabla Tarang E Low Tabla Tarang F Low Tabla Tarang F# Low Tabla Tarang G Low Tabla Tarang G# Low Tabla Tarang A Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang C Tabla na C Tabla tin C Tabla Center tin C Tabla ti 01 C Tabla ti 02 C Tabla ri C Tabla kat C Tabla tu D Tabla na D Tabla tin D Tabla Center tin D Tabla ti 01 D Tabla ti 02 D Tabla ri D Tabla kat D Tabla tu E Tabla na E Tabla tin E Tabla Center tin E Tabla ti 01 E Tabla ti 02 E Tabla ri E Tabla kat E Tabla tu F Tabla na F Tabla tin F Tabla Center tin F Tabla ti 01 F Tabla ti 02 F Tabla ri F Tabla kat F Tabla tu G Tabla na G Tabla tin G Tabla Center tin G Tabla ti 01 G Tabla ti 02 G Tabla ri G Tabla kat G Tabla tu 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 A Tabla na A Tabla tin A Tabla Center tin A Tabla ti 01 A Tabla ti 02 A Tabla ri A Tabla kat A Tabla tu Open Baya Mid Baya Press Baya Bend Baya Slow Bend Baya Fast Click Open Click G Low Tabla Tharang G# Low Tabla Tharang A Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang C Low Tabla Tarang C# Low Tabla Tarang D Low Tabla Tarang D# Low Tabla Tarang E Low Tabla Tarang F Low Tabla Tarang F# Low Tabla Tarang G Low Tabla Tarang G# Low Tabla Tarang A Low Tabla Tarang A# Low Tabla Tarang B Low Tabla Tarang C Tabla na C Tabla tin C Tabla Center tin C Tabla ti 01 C Tabla ti 02 C Tabla ri C Tabla kat C Tabla tu D Tabla na D Tabla tin D Tabla Center tin D Tabla ti 01 D Tabla ti 02 D Tabla ri D Tabla kat D Tabla tu E Tabla na E Tabla tin E Tabla Center tin E Tabla ti 01 E Tabla ti 02 E Tabla ri E Tabla kat E Tabla tu F Tabla na F Tabla tin F Tabla Center tin F Tabla ti 01 F Tabla ti 02 F Tabla ri F Tabla kat F Tabla tu G Tabla na G Tabla tin G Tabla Center tin G Tabla ti 01 G Tabla ti 02 G Tabla ri G Tabla kat G Tabla tu 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Indian Kit 2 Hateli Long Hateli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Tabla tun Tablabaya dhin Tabla di Tablabaya dhe Tabla ti Tabla ne Tabla taran Tabla tak Chipri Kanjira Open Kanjira Slap Kanjira Mute Kanjira Bend up Kanjira Bend down Dholak Open Dholak Mute Dholak Slap Dhol Open Dhol Mute Dhol Slap Dhol Slide Mridangam Normal Mridangam Open Mridangam Mute Mridangam Slap Mridangam Rim Chimta Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Open Dholki Mute Dholki Slap Dholki Slide Dholki Rim Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Mridang Open Mridang Mute Mridang Rim Mridang Slide Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Madal-A2 Madal-A#2 Madal-B2 Madal-C3 Madal-C#3 Madal-D3 Madal-D#3 Madal-E3 Madal-F3 Madal-F#3 Madal-G3 Alternate Group 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 13 13 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Appendix C1 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 67 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 Appendix D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 68 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 18 126/0/115 Indian Kit 1 Hand Clap Dafli Open Dafli Slap Dafli Rim Duff Open Duff Slap Duff Rim Hatheli Long Hatheli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Dhol 1 Open Dhol 1 Slap Dhol 1 Mute Dhol 1 Open Slap Dhol 1 Roll Dandia Short Dandia Long Chutki Chipri Khanjira Open Khanjira Slap Khanjira Mute Khanjira Bendup Khanjira Benddown Dholak 1 Open Dholak 1 Mute Dholak 1 Slap Dhol 2 Open Dhol 2 Slap Dhol 2 Rim Mridangam na Mridangam din Mridangam ki Mridangam ta Mridangam Chapu Mridangam Lo Closed Mridangam Lo Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Hi Open Dholki Hi Mute Dholki Lo Open Dholki Hi Slap Dholki Lo Slide Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Bhangra Scat 1 Bhangra Scat 2 Bhangra Scat 3 Bhangra Scat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Thavil Open Thavil Slap Thavil Mute Khartaal Dholak 2 Open Dholak 2 Slide Dholak 2 Rim 1 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Dholak 2 Ring Dholak 2 Slap Dholak 2 Body PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 19 126/0/112 Alternate Group Animal Kit 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 Rooster 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 12 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 Elephant Horse Cricket Cow Tiger Rattlesnake Monkeies Crow Drum Kit List C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 221 127/000/088 222 127/000/001 223 127/000/002 224 127/000/009 225 127/000/017 Power Kit Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Snare Soft Power 1 Kick Amb+ Open Rim Power 1 Kick Power Open Kick Power Closed Side Stick Power Snare Power Hand Clap Power Snare Rough Tom Power 1 Hi-Hat Closed Power Tom Power 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Power Tom Power 3 Hi-Hat Open Power Tom Power 4 Tom Power 5 Crash Cymbal Acoustic 1 Tom Power 6 Ride Cymbal Acoustic 1 Chinese Cymbal Acoustic Ride Cymbal Acoustic Splash Cymbal Acoustic Crash Cymbal Acoustic 2 Ride Cymbal Acoustic 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Short Side Stick Light Snare Short Snare Tight H Kick 2 Kick Gate Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Tight Tom Rock 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Appendix C1 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 69 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 Appendix D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 70 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 222 127/000/001 226 127/000/025 227 127/000/059 228 127/000/060 229 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Electronic Kit T8 Kit T9 Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Kick 3 Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Snare Noisy 2 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Electro 2 Tom Electro 3 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Electro 6 Snare Hammer Kick ZapHard Snare Garg L Kick TekPower Kick Slimy Kick T8 1 Snare Analog CR Snare T8 4 Snare Clap Analog Snare T8 3 Tom T8 5 Snare T8 5 Kick T8 3 Snare T8 4 Kick T8 2 Snare T8 3 T8 Kick Bass Kick T8 1 Snare T8 Rim Snare T8 2 Clap T9 Snare T8 1 Tom T8 1 Hi-Hat Closed T8 2 Tom T8 2 Hi-Hat Open T8 1 Tom T8 3 Hi-Hat Open T8 1 Tom T8 4 Tom T8 6 Crash T8 Tom T8 7 Ride T9 Chinese Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup 2 Tambourine RX5 Ride Cymbal 3 Conga T8 5 Conga T8 4 Conga T8 3 Conga T8 2 Conga T8 1 Snare Drum&Bass 1 Kick Break 2 Snare Distortion Kick TekPower Kick Distortion RM Kick T9 2 Snare Analog CR Snare T9 5 Clap Analog Sm Snare T9 Gate Snare Rock Roll Snare T9 3 Snare T9 4 Snare T9 Gate Kick T9 4 Snare T9 5 Kick T9 1 Kick T9 3 Snare T9 Rim Snare T9 1 Clap T9 Snare T9 2 Tom T9 1 Hi-Hat Closed T9 Tom T9 2 Hi-Hat Pedal T9 Tom T9 3 Hi-Hat Open T9 Tom T9 4 Tom T9 5 Crash T9 Tom T9 6 Ride T9 Chinese Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup 2 Tambourine RX5 Crash Cymbal 3 Cowbell 1 Crash Cymbal 4 Cowbell T8 Ride Cymbal 3 Conga T8 5 Conga T8 4 Conga Tip Conga Open Slap Conga Open Glass H Glass L Analog Click Conga T8 1 Maracas T8 FxGun 2 FxGun 1 Analog Shaker H Analog Shaker L Clave T8 Hi Q 1 Hi Q 2 Scratch L Scratch L 2 Maracas Slur FxGun 2 FxGun 1 Scratch H 2 Scratch Down Hi Q 3 Hi Q 1 Hi Q 2 Scratch L Scratch L 2 Analog Shaker Sleigh Bell Wind Chime Snare Hip 1 Snare Hip 2 Snare Hip Gate Snare Break 1 Kick Blip Snare FX 1 Kick FxHammer Analog Shaker Sleigh Bell Wind Chime Snare Piccolo Snare T8 5 Snare Rock Roll Distortion Snare Brush Mute Kick Blip Hard Snare Jungle 1 Kick Sustain Cowbell T8 Crash Cymbal 4 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Kick 3 Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Drum Kit List * Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list below. 230 127/000/113 231 127/000/033 232 127/000/041 233 127/000/049 234 126/000/001 235 126/000/002 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Open Rim Shot Light Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Stick Light Snare Jazz L Kick Jazz Stick Light Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Band Snare 2 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footeps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Cowbell Analog Hand Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Short Appendix Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 TurnTableNoise Maou PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 71 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 Appendix D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 72 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 222 127/000/001 236 126/000/021 237 126/000/022 Standard Kit 1 Bass Drum Kit Reverse Bass Drum Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree BD Electro BD FX Gate BD Hammer BD Analog Power BD Analog Distortion 5 BD Analog Distortion 6 BD Analog Distortion 4 BD Analog Distortion 3 BD Analog Distortion 2 BD Analog Tight BD Analog 94 BD Analog Blip 2 BD Analog Rubber 2 BD Analog 93 BD Analog 90 BD Analog 83 BD Analog 82 BD Analog 92 BD Analog 91 BD Analog Deep BD Analog Hard 2 BD Analog Hard 1 BD Analog Blip 1 BD Analog Rubber 1 BD Analog Loose BD Synth 1 BD Synth 2 BD Analog Distortion 1 Ripper BD Analog 70 L BD Analog 70 BD Analog 80 BD Analog 80 Long BD Dry BD Dry Hard BD Room 1 BD Soft BD Room 2 BD Break Lo-fi 2 BD Break Lo-fi 1 BD & Hi-Hat Open BD Jungle 2 BD Jungle 1 BD Jungle 3 BD D&B 1 BD D&B 2 BD RX5 1 BD RX5 2 BD Room 3 BD Power Gate BD R&B 1 BD R&B 2 BD Lo-fi BD Hip Deep BD Break Deep BD Break Heavy BD Break Hard Big Drum Taiko Drum Surdo Open Feet 2 BD Industrial Door Slam Punch Heart Feet 1 BD Human BD Human Deep Vox Buh! Vox Muh! 238 126/000/125 China Kit 1 Alternate Group Reverse BD Electro Reverse BD FX Gate Reverse BD Hammer Reverse BD Analog Power Reverse BD Analog Distortion 6 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 3 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 2 Reverse BD Analog Tight Reverse BD Analog 94 Reverse BD Analog Blip 2 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 2 Reverse BD Analog 93 Reverse BD Analog 90 Reverse BD Analog 83 Reverse BD Analog 82 Reverse BD Analog 91 Reverse BD Analog Deep Reverse BD Analog Hard 1 Reverse BD Analog Blip 1 Reverse BD Analog Rubber 1 Reverse BD Analog Loose Reverse BD Synth 1 Reverse BD Synth 2 Reverse BD Analog Distortion 1 Reverse Ripper Reverse BD Analog 70 Reverse BD Analog 81 Reverse BD Dry Reverse BD Soft Reverse BD Room 2 Reverse BD Break Lo-fi 2 Reverse BD Break Lo-fi 1 Reverse BD & Hi-Hat Open Reverse BD Jungle 3 Reverse BD D&B 1 Reverse BD D&B 2 Reverse BD RX5 1 Reverse BD RX5 2 Reverse BD Room 3 Reverse BD Power Gate Reverse BD R&B 1 Reverse BD R&B 2 Reverse BD Lo-fi Reverse BD Break Deep Reverse BD Break Heavy Reverse BD Break Hard Reverse Big Drum Reverse Taiko Drum Reverse Surdo Open Reverse Feet 2 Reverse Tom Industrial Reverse Door Slam Reverse Punch Reverse Feet 1 Reverse BD Human Reverse BD Human Deep Reverse Vox Buh! Reverse Vox Muh! Da Cha Da Gu mp Da Gu rim Da Gu f Da Gu hand Da Gu roll Pai Gu 4 Pai Gu 4 High Pai Gu 3 Pai Gu 3 High Pai Gu 2 Pai Gu 2 High Pai Gu 1 Luo High 1 Gong batter Jin Luo Luo High 2 Luo Mid-Low Luo Jin Luo Low Da Cha Da Cha effect Zhong Cha Xiao Cha effect Xiao Cha Mang Luo Low Mang Luo Mid Qing Finger Bell Luo big Mu Yu Low Mu Yu Mid-Low Mu Yu Mid Mu Yu High Nan Bang Zi roll Nan Bang Zi Ban Gu Ban Ban Gu roll Chinese Opera Voice 1 Chinese Opera Voice 2 Chinese Opera Voice 3 Yun Luo F4 Yun Luo F#4 Yun Luo G4 Yun Luo G#4 Yun Luo A4 Yun Luo A#4 Yun Luo B4 Yun Luo C5 Yun Luo C#5 Yun Luo D5 Yun Luo D#5 Yun Luo E5 Yun Luo F5 Yun Luo F#5 Yun Luo G5 Yun Luo G#5 Yun Luo A5 Yun Luo A#5 Yun Luo B5 Yun Luo C6 2 2 2 2 5 5 5 1 1 3 3 4 4 4 Drum Kit List * Actual keyboard notes of the Arabic Kit are one octave higher than the ones described in the list below. Dagu Mute Zhongcha Mute Dagu Heavy Zhongcha Open Paigu Middle Paigu Low Xiaocha Mute Bangu Xiaocha Open Bangzi Muyu Low Zhongluo Mute Muyu Mid-Low Zhongluo Open Muyu Middle Xiaoluo Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Alternate Group 4 5 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 240 126/000/037 241 126/000/041 Arabic Kit * Cuban Kit Zarb Back mf Zarb Tom f Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Tombak Tom f Neghareh Tom f Tombak Back f Neghareh Back f Tombak Snap f Neghareh Pelang f Tombak Trill Khaligi Clap 1 Arabic Zalgouta Open Khaligi Clap 2 Arabic Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Tabel Tak 1 Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 2 Tabel Tak 2 Sagat 3 Riq Tik 3 Riq Tik 2 Riq Tik Hard 1 Riq Tik 1 Riq Tik Hard 2 Riq Tik Hard 3 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 2 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 1 Riq Sak Riq Snouj 3 Riq Snouj 4 Riq Tak 1 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tak 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Dom Katem Tak Doff Katem Dom Katem Sak 1 Katem Tak 1 Katem Sak 2 Katem Tak 2 Daholla Sak 2 Daholla Sak 1 Daholla Tak 1 Daholla Dom Daholla Tak 2 Tablah Prok Tablah Dom 2 Tablah Roll of Edge Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tak Trill 2 Tablah Tak Finger 2 Tablah Tak Finger 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Mute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Paila L Timbale H Open Paila H Cowbell Top Guiro Short Guiro Long Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Appendix 239 127/000/127 China Kit 2 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 73 Style List Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Appendix 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 74 Style Name INDIAN Bhajan Bolly 1 Bolly 2 Bolly 3 Bolly 4 Indy Pop Hind Bld IndyWlz1 IndyWlz2 Bhangra1 Bhangra2 Boliyan BaleBale IndyDnc1 IndyDnc2 Tamil Kerala Goa Grv Goan Pop Rajsthan Dandiya MdrnQwal Qawwali 8BEAT BritRock 8BtModrn Cool 8Bt 60sGtPop 8BtAdria 60s8Beat BblgumPp BritPpSw 8Beat Off Beat 60s Rock HardRock RockShfl 8Bt Rock 16BEAT 16Beat PopShf 1 PopShf 2 Gtr Pop 16Bt Up KoolShfl JazzRock HH Light BALLAD Glam Pno Gtr Bld PianoBld LoveSong 68Modern 68SlowRk 68OrcBld OrganBld Pop Bld 16Bld 1 16Bld 2 DANCE AgagBeat CoastDnc ClubBeat PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Style No. 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Style Name Electron FunkyHse ChartR&B MellowHH Soul R&B Soul Bld Chillout EuTrance Ibiza DreamDnc NewHipHp Pop R&B TrancPop ChartPop HouseMsk Swing H TcnPolis Clubdanc Club Ltn Garage 1 Garage 2 TcnParty UK Pop HHGroove Hip Shfl HipHopPp DISCO ModDisco 70sDsc 1 70sDsc 2 LatinDsc DscPhily SatNight DscChoco DscHands SWING&JAZZ BB Fast BBMedium BBBallad BB Shfl AcousJaz AcidJazz JazzClub Swing 1 Swing 2 OrchSwng FiveFour Jazz Bld Dixie Ragtime AfroCubn Charlstn R&B Blues Rk Soul DetPop 1 60s R&R 6/8 Soul ModrnR&B CroTwist Rck&Roll DetPop 2 Boogie 1 Boogie 2 Style No. 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 Style Name 6/8Blues COUNTRY Cntry8Bt CntryPop CntrySwg CntryBld Cntry2/4 CowboyBg CntryShf Blgrass LATIN BrzSamba Bossa PopBossa Forro Srtanejo Tijuana Joropo Parranda Regaeton DscLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GtrRumba Flamenco RmbIslnd Reggae BALLROOM VienWltz EngWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstp Tango Pasodobl Samba ChaCha Rumba Jive TRAD & WORLD US March 6/8March GerMarch PolkaPop OberPlka Trntella Showtune Xmas Swg XmasWltz Reel Hawaiian Durngens CGrupera Saeidy WehdaSag Laff IranElec Emarati Luo Gu Jing Ju Dangdut Kroncong Tabla/Tanpura Pattern List 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 Style Name WALTZ ItalyWlz MriacWlz Serenade SwingWlz Jz Wlz 1 Jz Wlz 2 CntryWlz OberWltz Musette CHILDREN Learn2/4 Learn4/4 Learn6/8 Fun 3/4 Fun 4/4 PIANIST Stride PnoBls 1 PnoBls 2 Pno Rag Pno R&R PnoBoogi PnoJzWlz PnoJzBld Arpeggio Musical SlowRock 8Pno Bld PnoSwing Pattern No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Pattern Name TeenTaal Rupak JhapTaal EkTaal ChauTaal Chachar Dadra Keherwa Garba Bhajan Punjabi Tishram Chtushrm Khandam Mishram Sankernm Appendix Style No. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 75 Song List Song No. Song Name Composer Main Demo 1 2 3 50 51 Voice Demo Grand Piano Demo Sweet! Tenor Sax Demo Cool! Rotor Organ Demo Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo Power Kit Drum Demo Dance Kit Drum Demo Afro Cuban Kit Percussion Demo Piano Solo Maple Leaf Rag Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair The Last Rose of Summer For Elise Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Turkish March Menuett/Beethoven Andante grazioso (Sonate K.331) 24 Preludes op.28-7 Melodie (Album für die Jugend) Fröhlicher Landmann (Album für die Jugend) Von fremden Ländern und Menschen (Kinderszenen) Träumerei (Kinderszenen) Thema (Impromptus D.935-3) Menuett BWV. Anh.116 Invention Nr.1 Gavotte/J. S. Bach Arietta/Grieg To a Wild Rose Tango/Albeniz La Fille aux Cheveux de Lin La Chevaleresque Arabesque Pastorale Annie Laurie The Entertainer Piano Ensemble Amazing Grace Die Lorelei Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. Scarborough Fair Old Folks at Home Londonderry Air Home Sweet Home Jesus bleibet meine Freude Loch Lomond Twinkle Twinkle Little Star Three Blind Mice Believe Me If All Those Endearing Young Charms Nocturne op.9-2 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” 52 Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär Der Vogelfänger bin ich ja Romanze (Serenade K.525) Ave Verum Corpus Liebesträume Nr.3 Chanson du Toreador 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Appendix 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 76 India GlobePop Chillin PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original S. Joplin S. C. Foster Traditional L. v. Beethoven F. Chopin W.A. Mozart L. v. Beethoven W. A. Mozart F. Chopin R. Schumann R. Schumann R. Schumann R. Schumann F. Schubert J. S. Bach J. S. Bach J. S. Bach E. Grieg E. A. MacDowell I. Albéniz C. A. Debussy J. F. Burgmüller J. F. Burgmüller J. F. Burgmüller Traditional S. Joplin Traditional F. Silcher W. A. Mozart Traditional S. C. Foster Traditional H. R. Bishop J. S. Bach Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional F. Chopin F. Chopin J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod J. S. Bach Traditional W. A. Mozart W. A. Mozart W. A. Mozart F. Liszt G. Bizet Song No. 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Song Name Frühlingslied Ode to Joy O Christmas Tree Deck the Halls Silent Night Piano Accompaniment Ep Ballad Boogie Woogie Rock Piano Salsa Country Piano Gospel R&B Medium Swing Jazz Waltz Medium Bossa Slow Rock Classical Melodies Waltz (The Sleeping Beauty) Air (Orchestral Suite) Minuetto/Boccherini Siciliano/J. S. Bach Menuet (L'Arlésienne) Slavonic Dances op.72-2 Largo (From the New World) Pizzicato Polka Romanze/Beethoven Swan Lake Sicilienne/Fauré Méditation (Thaïs) Serenade/Haydn Grand March (Aida) Danza dell'Ore (La Gioconda) Le Cygne (Le Carnaval des Animaux) L'éléphant (Le Carnaval des Animaux) Fossiles (Le Carnaval des Animaux) Wachet auf, ruft uns die Stimme BWV. 645 Traditional Melodies Greensleeves Beautiful Dreamer Ring de Banjo O du lieber Augustin London Bridge Aura Lee Aloha Oe Raga Scale Bilawal Khamaaj Bhairav Kalyan Asavari Kalyani Hamsadhvani Mohanam Hindolam Sankarabharanam Composer F. Mendelssohn L. v. Beethoven Traditional Traditional F. Gruber Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original P. I. Tchaikovsky J. S. Bach L. Boccherini J. S. Bach G. Bizet A. Dvořák A. Dvořák J. Strauss II L. v. Beethoven P. I. Tchaikovsky G. Fauré J. Massenet F. J. Haydn G. Verdi A. Ponchielli C. Saint-Saëns C. Saint-Saëns C. Saint-Saëns J. S. Bach Traditional S. C. Foster S. C. Foster Traditional Traditional Traditional Q. Liliuokalani – – – – – – – – – – Arpeggio List Arpeggio Name UpOct DownOct UpDwnOct SynArp1 SynArp2 SynArp3 SynArp4 SyncEcho PulsLine StepLine Random Down&Up SuperArp AcidLine TekEcho VelGruv Planet Trance1 Trance2 Trance3 ChordAlt SynChrd1 SynChrd2 Syncopa Hybrid1 Hybrid2 Hybrid3 Hybrid4 Hybrid5 PfArp1 PfArp2 PfArp3 PfArp4 PfClub1 PfClub2 PfBallad PfChd8th EPArp PfShufle PfRock Clavi1 Clavi2 RocknPf 70RockPf SlowflPf SoulPf ChordUp ChdDance LatinRck Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae1 Reggae2 Reggae3 6/8R&B Gospel BalladEP Strum1 Strum2 Strum3 Strum4 Pickin1 Pickin2 Funky GtrChrd1 Arpeggio No. 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 Arpeggio Name GtrChrd2 GtrChrd3 GtrArp FngrPck1 FngrPck2 CleanGtr Slowfl Samba1 Samba2 Spanish1 Spanish2 Harp1 Harp2 FngrBas1 FngrBas2 FngrBas3 CoolFunk SlapBass AcidBas1 AcidBas2 FunkyBas CmbJazB1 CmbJazB2 CmbJazB3 NewR&BBs HipHopBs SmoothBs DreamBas TranceBs LatinBas Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 Strings4 StrngDwn StrngUp OrcheStr Jupiter Pizz1 Pizz2 BrasSec1 BrasSec2 BrasSec3 FunkBras SoulReed DiscoLd SmoothPd PercArp Trill Cresendo DiscoCP Perc1 Perc2 R&B Funk1 Funk2 Funk3 Soul ClscHip Smooth NewGospl CmbJazz1 CmbJazz2 Bebop JazzHop Arpeggio No. 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 Arpeggio Name FolkRock Unplugge HipHop Trance Dream 2 Step ClubHs1 ClubHs2 EuroTek House Ibiza1 Ibiza2 Ibiza3 Garage Samba African Latin China Indian Arabic TeenTalC TeenTalD TeenTalE TeenTalF TeenTalG TeenTalA Dadra C Dadra D Dadra E Dadra F Dadra G Dadra A Appendix Arpeggio No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 77 Music Database List MDB No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Appendix 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 78 MDB Name ALL TIME HITS Jude Hey New UK MyLoving All OK Buttercp JustCall CheepChp Daddy's Dance? GetBack GtrWheel HighTide IWasBorn Sailing BluJeans Holiday Imagine LoveMe LetItBld LdyMdona YelowSub Marriage MovinOut My Shell NowNever DoLoveMe TcktRide SeeClear Masachus Hard Day USA Pie Norway YesterBd MODERN POP Watches SoundMPH Hold Us Unfound NeedSome PrtTmLvr MoonShdw NikitSng Sure of Off Day Tell Her GirlsMne NeedLove Radio POP CLASSICS Standing RainLaff Sunshine ForNamdo ThankFor ManPiano CoinLane LovesYou Tmbourin Alone GldField Raindrop SultanSw Life'sWk TopWorld PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual MDB No. 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 MDB Name WatchGrl POP BALLAD WnderLnd CanIStop EvryTime IvoryAnd TheWorld LovWoman Dolannes Madigan Paradise Whisper BALLAD AllOdds AtonalFl Hero Woman RunToYou LoveOfAl CndleWnd Cavatina Cherish ToLoveMe YouKnow Evrythng EyesOfBl Hello BeThere FlyAway LoveYou NeverLet JustOnce IfYouGo SavingAl InTheDrk LovePwr Vision Beautifl AllAlone Opposite BeHonest SayYou SayNthng Stranger OneDay TheBayou ThisSong Distance ThisWay LoveGone Inspirng TrueColr ROCK & ROLL ShakenUp Beethovn HurryLov BeCruel Jumping Countdwn SuePeggy Champion Jailhous BlueShoe Rockin24 Shouting MDB No. 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 MDB Name Rock&Rll HonkyTnk OLDIES Daydream Sumertme Diana's Uptown Apache IGotIt Tonight MyPillow NoRain FinalDan SlpnLion Ghetto LipsLcky PrettyWm TikiGtr TurnThre Sherry DANCE & DISCO Babylon Goodbye Catch22 DISCO Survival TheNavy DontHide Celebrat LondonRU 10,2 Sun ShakeYou Believe BoySumer I'mSexy StuffHot SWING & JAZZ MoonOf Patrol Charles GiveLove HallOfMe Rhythm LOVE LeroyBad Caraban Misbehav Safari Smiling SoWhatIs TimeGone TasteHny Sandman Tunisian TwoFoot MyBaby R&B Sally's AsPlayed BabyGrov Highwy66 SweetCHI JustU&Me ManLoves OurLove Music Database List 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 MDB Name Wish I What COUNTRY OnTheRd Breathe InMyMind ContryHw GreenGrs EverNeed Lonesome Lucille HomeRng Tennesse LATIN Bananabt DanceMng DntWorry Jamaica FleaSpa I'mPola MamboJm OneNote PasoCani SayNoMor Beguine Tijuana Picture ENTERTAINMENT OnTheHil Barnacle Califrag DadClock DanceLd DnceFire BigCntry Cabaret OdeToJoy Mi-Re-Do MyPrince Necesary NoBuiz NoisyOld Sleigh RockBaby Magnifiq Magnfcnt SilentNt Nabucco Standing SummerPl Christms Favorite Tubbie Turkish 12OClock WALTZ & TRAD Blk&Whte CanCan Charmain Musicbox Clementn Doodah! Dreamer EnterRag Birthday MDB No. 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 MDB Name MaryLamb Donald's MoonWlz MoulinHt Sunshine PieceOf GreenSlv TakeFour TexRose ThePolka Scarboro Edelweis AroundWd Whatever Yankee's WORLD Hawaii D'amor ElCondor GoodbyRm ILandOn ItalyBel Cucarumb Puntuali Cielito ItalySun SantaLuc Trumpetr VanMass PIANIST ItalySun BeGood Birdland BlueRose Chaie's Highwy66 Leaves Miload Cabaret Wonderfl Imagine LtleStar MapleRag Mi-Re-Do NoBuiz OhBlah Charades Sally's Nabucco SunnyStr MistyFln LdnBridg GrndClck Importnc Snowman Favorite SongForU SugerSpn ThisWay WenSmile ZipperD Appendix MDB No. 186 187 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 79 Effect Type List Harmony Types No. 01 02 03 04 05 Harmony Type Duet Trio Block Country Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note Description Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting. The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighthnote triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. • The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played. Appendix Reverb Types No. 01–03 04–05 06–07 08–09 10 Reverb Type Hall 1–3 Room 1–2 Stage 1–2 Plate 1–2 Off Description Concert hall reverb. Small room reverb. Reverb for solo instruments. Simulated steel plate reverb. No effect. Chorus Types No. 01–02 03–04 05 80 Chorus Type Chorus 1–2 Flanger 1–2 Off PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual Description Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. No effect. Specifications Keyboard Other Controllers Display Voices Effects Accompaniment Styles Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight Number of Keys Touch Response Pitch Bend Control Knobs Display Language Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) Preset Number of Voices Compatibility Reverb Chorus Master EQ Types Harmony Ultra-Wide Stereo Dual Functions Split Arpeggio type Number of Preset Styles Fingering Preset Style Control User Styles Other Features Tabla/Tanpura pattern Preset Preset Recording/Playback Recording Music Database One Touch Setting (OTS) Number of Preset Tabla Patterns Number of Variations Number of Preset Tanpura Patterns Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Compatible Data Format Function Playback Recording Lesson/Guide Registration Overall Miscellaneous Memory Memory/Connectivity Connectivity Amplifiers/Speakers Number of Buttons Metronome Tempo Range Transpose Tuning Portable Grand Button Internal Memory External Strage Device DC IN Headphones/Output Sustain Pedal USB TO DEVICE USB TO HOST Amplifiers Speakers Adaptor Power Supply Power Supply Batteries Power Consumption Auto Power Off Function Included Accessories Accessories Optional Accessories 946 mm x 405 mm x 140 mm (37-1/4” x 15-15/16” x 5-1/2”) 6.8 kg (15lbs 0oz.) (not including batteries) 61 Yes Yes Yes LCD display English AWM Stereo Sampling 32 214 + 466XGlite + 6 Indian Kits + 21 Drum/SFX Kits + 46 Arpeggio GM, XGlite 9 types 4 types 5 types 26 types 3 types Yes Yes 162 types 206 Multi finger ACMP ON/OFF, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL, SYNC START, SYNC STOP, START/STOP, TRACK ON/OFF 5 305 Yes 16 5 (for each Tabla Pattern) 4 (for all Tabla Patterns) 110 10 6 (5 Melody + 1 Style) Approx. 19,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded) Approx. 5,500 chords (when only “chord” tracks are recorded) SMF Original File Format (SMF conversion function) [1 LISTENING, 2 TIMING, 3 WAITING], [Repeat & Learn], [Chord Dictionary] 4 (x 8 banks) with Freeze function Yes 11 – 280 -12 to 0, 0 to +12 427.0 – 440.0 – 453.0 Hz Yes Approx. 1.54MB USB flash memory DC IN 12V [PHONES/OUTPUT] x 1 [SUSTAIN] x 1 Yes Yes 2.5W + 2.5W 12cm×2 + 3cm×2 • Adaptor: PA-150A or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargable batteries • 16W (PA-150A) Yes • Owner’s Manual • AC Power Adaptor PA-150A or an equivalent • Music Rest • Online Member Product Registration • AC Power Adaptor PA-150A or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Keyboard Stand (L-2C) • Stereo Headphones (HPE-150/HPE-30) • Footswitch (FC4/FC5) Appendix Size/Weight * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 81 Index A E L AC Power Adaptor .................. 9, 12 Accessories .................................... 9 ACMP ..................................... 22, 40 Arpeggio ................................. 20, 39 Arpeggio List ............................... 77 Arpeggio Quantize ................ 39, 49 Arpeggio Type ....................... 20, 49 Arpeggio Velocity ........................ 49 ATTACK ...................................... 37 Attack Time ..................... 37, 48, 49 Auto Accompaniment ................. 40 Auto Accompaniment range ....... 22 AUTO FILL ................................. 40 Auto Power Off ............................ 14 Auto Power Off Time .................. 50 EFFECT ..................................37, 38 Effect Type List ............................80 EG .................................................38 EG (Envelope Generator) ............37 ENDING .......................................40 Envelope Generator .....................37 EQ Setting ....................................35 EQ Type ........................................35 Error ..............................................59 Excellent .......................................27 Exit? ..............................................59 External Clock ..............................50 Lesson .......................................... 26 Lesson Track ................................ 50 Listen ............................................ 26 Load STY ..................................... 57 Load USR .................................... 56 Local Control ............................... 49 B Backup .......................................... 32 Backup Clear ............................... 32 Backup Parameters ...................... 32 Battery .......................................... 12 Battery Type ........................... 12, 50 Beat ............................................... 15 BGM Playback ............................ 46 C Can’t Use ...................................... 59 Chord ...................................... 15, 43 Chord Dictionary ......................... 45 CHORUS ...................................... 37 Chorus Depth ................... 33, 48, 49 Chorus Type ........................... 33, 49 Complet. ....................................... 59 Computer-related Operations ....... 9 CUTOFF ...................................... 37 D Appendix Data Err ........................................ 59 Del SMF ....................................... 58 Del USR ....................................... 58 Demo Cancel ......................... 32, 50 Demo Group .......................... 32, 50 Demo Play Mode ......................... 50 Demo Song ................................... 24 Disk Ful ........................................ 59 Display ......................................... 15 Drum Kit List ............................... 67 Dual Voice ........................ 16, 36, 49 82 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual F Fast Forward .................................25 Fast Reverse ..................................25 File Control ..................................59 File Ful ..........................................59 FILTER ...................................37, 38 Filter ..............................................21 Filter Cutoff ............................21, 49 Filter Resonance ....................21, 49 Flash Clear ....................................32 Footswitch ..............................13, 39 Format ...........................................53 Freeze Mode .....................31, 32, 50 Function ........................................48 Function List ................................48 M MAIN ........................................... 40 Main ............................................. 16 Main Voice ................................... 16 Master EQ Type ..................... 32, 49 MASTER VOLUME .................. 14 MEASURE .................................. 15 Melody Voice ............................... 47 Metronome ............................. 18, 50 Metronome Volume ..................... 18 MIDI Basics ................................... 9 MIDI Reference ............................. 9 Music Database ........................... 22 Music Rest ..................................... 9 N no data .......................................... 59 no file ............................................ 59 Notation ........................................ 15 O G GM System Level 1 .......................8 Grade .......................................27, 50 Octave ..................................... 48, 49 OK ................................................ 27 One Touch Setting ....................... 34 H P Harmony .......................................19 Harmony Type ........................19, 49 Harmony Volume .........................49 Headphone ....................................13 Pan .......................................... 48, 49 Pause ............................................. 25 PC mode ....................................... 49 Pedal Function ............................. 50 PITCH BEND .............................. 34 Pitch Bend Range .................. 34, 48 Pitch Controls .............................. 34 Power ............................................ 14 Power Requirements ................... 12 Power source ................................ 13 Preset Song .................................. 47 Protect .......................................... 59 I Initial Send ...................................50 Initialization .................................32 INTRO ..........................................40 K Keyboard Out ...............................50 Knob ........................................21, 37 Knob assignment ..........................15 Index RAGA SCALE ............................ 24 Random ........................................ 46 Recording ..................................... 28 Registration Memory .................. 31 RELEASE .................................... 38 Release Time .......................... 38, 49 Repeat ........................................... 25 Repeat & Learn ............................ 27 RESONANCE ............................. 37 REVERB ...................................... 37 Reverb Depth ................... 33, 48, 49 Reverb Type ........................... 33, 49 Track On/Off ................................25 Transpose ................................34, 48 Troubleshooting ...........................60 Tuning .....................................34, 48 U UnFormat ......................................59 USB .................................................8 USB Flash Memory .....................51 USB TO DEVICE ........................51 USB TO HOST ............................11 UseAdpt ........................................59 User Song .....................................28 S V Save SMF ..................................... 55 Save USR ..................................... 54 Section .......................................... 40 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ......... 55 Song .............................................. 24 Song Book ...................................... 9 Song Category ............................. 24 Song List ...................................... 76 Song Out ...................................... 50 Song Volume .................... 32, 47, 48 Sostenuto ................................ 13, 50 Split Point ............................... 43, 48 Split Voice ........................ 17, 36, 49 Style ........................................ 22, 40 STYLE FILE ................................. 8 Style File ...................................... 57 STYLE FILTER .......................... 38 Style List ...................................... 74 Style Out ...................................... 50 Style Volume .......................... 42, 48 Sustain .......................................... 39 SYNC START .............................. 22 Synchro Start ............................... 40 Synchro Stop ................................ 41 Variation .................................23, 42 Very Good .....................................27 Voice List ......................................61 Volume ....................................48, 49 Volume of the Pattern ..................42 Volume of the Style .....................42 W Waiting ..........................................26 Wide Type .....................................49 X XGlite .............................................8 Y Your Tempo ..................................50 Appendix R T Tabla ....................................... 23, 37 Tabla/Tanpura Pattern List .......... 75 Tanpura ................................... 23, 37 Tap Start ....................................... 42 Tempo ..................................... 18, 42 Time Signature ....................... 18, 50 Timing .......................................... 26 Touch Sensitivity ................... 35, 48 Track ............................................. 28 TRACK CONTROL .................... 41 PSR-I455 Owner’s Manual 83 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387-8080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office) Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Poland Office ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 BULGARIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: 02-978-20-25 MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel: 02133-2144 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector 47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: 6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 DMI4 Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2012 Yamaha Corporation 205POTY*.*-01A0 Printed in China ZC95840